JP7246693B2 - light emitting device - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine and a light-emitting device used in a game device connected to the game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines and gaming devices connected to gaming machines are provided with decorative light-emitting devices for improving the aesthetic appearance. As an example, Patent Document 1 discloses a light emitting device including a light guide member that emits light from an end face and a plurality of LEDs that emit light toward the end face of the light guide member. A game machine is disclosed.

JP 2016-116909 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, for example, static electricity from the outside is transmitted to the LED through the light guide member and the like when the user touches the light guide member and members in the vicinity thereof, and the LED The problem arises that the substrate is short-circuited and damaged.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems. The purpose is to provide an apparatus.

The light-emitting device (light-emitting device 2001) according to the present invention is
An outer panel (outer panel 2030) capable of forming an accommodation space inside, a light emitting means (LED 2005) accommodated in the accommodation space (accommodation space 2031), and a light guide member for guiding light from the light emitting means (LED 2005) (Light guide panel 2010) A light emitting device (light emitting device 2001) comprising
The light guide member (light guide panel 2010) has a light incident end face (first light incident end face 2015a1) adjacent to the light emitting means (LED 2005) and into which the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED 2005) enters. One part (first part 2015a) and a second part (second portion 2014) and
The first portion (first portion 2015a) is accommodated in the accommodation space (accommodation space 2031), and the second portion (second portion 2014) is partially in the accommodation space (accommodation space 2031). exposed to the outside,
The surface (rear surface 2016a2) of the light guide member (light guide panel 2010) and the end (end 2009a) of the outer panel (outer panel 2030) are adjacent to the light guide member (light guide panel 2010). A protrusion (protrusion 2016a3) is provided for increasing the creepage distance from the portion where the light enters to the light incident end face (first light entering end face 2015a1).

According to the above configuration, since the protrusion is formed on the light guide member to increase the creepage distance, for example, even if the user touches the light emitting unit, static electricity is transmitted to the light emitting unit, short-circuiting and damaging the light emitting unit. can be suppressed.

According to the present invention, static electricity from the outside can be prevented from being transmitted to the light emitting means via the light guide member, short-circuiting the light emitting means, and damaging the light emitting means.

1 is a schematic diagram showing a game system including a game display device according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an overall perspective view of a game display device according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game display device according to a first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the screen unit of the game display device according to the first embodiment from the back side; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating display contents of the gaming display device according to the first embodiment; The whole perspective view of the display device for games which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display device for games which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display device for games which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display device for games based on the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display device for games based on the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment. The perspective view of the game apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming device according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a game device according to a fourth embodiment from the rear side; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a game device according to a fourth embodiment from the rear side; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from LEDs traveling through the light guide plate according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from LEDs traveling through the light guide plate according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an illumination mode of the light guide plate according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a game device according to a fourth embodiment from the rear side; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a projector container included in a game device according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a projector container included in a game device according to a fifth embodiment; A block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a projector housing according to the fifth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart of control processing executed by a control circuit according to the fifth embodiment; It is a perspective view of a data display machine and a game machine according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a data display device according to a sixth embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachi-slot machine according to a sixth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a data display device according to a sixth embodiment; It is a game state determination table according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a production pattern table according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of details of signals for each terminal transmitted from an external terminal board of a gaming machine as a pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of details of signals for each terminal transmitted from an external terminal board of a gaming machine as a pachi-slot machine according to the sixth embodiment; It is a diagram showing an example of a state transition diagram of the game state of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display interlocked with the effect of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment; It is a flow chart of production execution processing which the control part concerning a 6th embodiment performs. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the top lamp which concerns on the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the top lamp which concerns on the modification of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a production pattern table according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a game state transition table according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart of the production|presentation execution process which concerns on 7th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming device and a gaming system according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing processing executed by a sub CPU of a gaming device according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a state transition diagram of a main CPU in a gaming device according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a state transition diagram of a sub CPU in a gaming device according to an eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming device and gaming system according to a ninth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a table showing through processing and change processing executed in the gaming device according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming device and gaming system according to a tenth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing processing executed by the main CPU of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming device and gaming system according to an eleventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a storage unit included in a gaming device according to an eleventh embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing processing executed by a sub CPU of the gaming device according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 23 is a table showing write processing, first read processing, and second read processing executed by a sub CPU of the gaming device according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a game device and a game system according to a twelfth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing processing executed by the main CPU of the gaming device according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a control unit according to a thirteenth embodiment viewed from one side in the width direction; FIG. 54 is a perspective view of the control unit according to the thirteenth embodiment as seen from the side opposite to that in FIG. 53 ; FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a control unit according to a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a perspective view of a fan cover of a control unit according to a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a side view of the fan cover of the control unit according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a top view of the fan cover of the control unit according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a fan cover and an exhaust fan in a pre-assembly state of a control unit according to a thirteenth embodiment, viewed from above; FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the fan cover and the exhaust fan before assembly of the control unit according to the thirteenth embodiment, as viewed from below; It is a front view of a game device according to a fourteenth embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the apparatus for games based on 14th Embodiment from the back side. FIG. 22 shows a state in which the cover covering the housing space of the camera unit is removed in the game device according to the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 shows a state in which the camera unit is removed from the gaming device according to the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a liquid crystal base and a camera unit base to which a camera unit is attached in a game device according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a perspective view of a camera unit base of a gaming device according to a fourteenth embodiment and a camera unit before being attached to the camera unit base as seen from below; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of a case in which the camera unit is installed in the game device according to the fourteenth embodiment with the front and back reversed. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the gaming device according to the fourteenth embodiment when the camera unit is installed in an upside-down posture; FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a camera unit mounting portion of a gaming device according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a front view of a game display device according to fifteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth embodiments; FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing a rear panel and a light emitting device of a game display device according to a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a main part of a rear panel and a light emitting device of a game display device according to a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a front view of a main part of a rear panel and a light emitting device of a game display device according to a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a main part of a light guide panel of a game display device according to a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a long portion of a light guide panel of a game display device according to a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a rear panel and a light-emitting device of a game display device according to a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a path of light that has entered the first light guide section and travels from the first light guide section to the second light guide section of the game display device according to the fifteenth embodiment; 71 is a perspective view of the upper panel of the light guide panel shown in FIG. 70, which is the upper panel of the gaming display device according to the sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments; FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of a main part of a rear panel and a light emitting device of a game display device according to a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a perspective view of a main part of a rear panel and a light emitting device of a game display device according to a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of a main part of the light guide panel of the game display device according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a side view of a main part of a light guide panel of a game display device according to a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a plan view of a main part of a light guide panel of a game display device according to a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of the main parts of the rear panel and light emitting device shown in FIG. 70, which is the rear panel and light emitting device of the gaming display device according to the seventeenth embodiment;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<First embodiment>
First, a basic overview of a gaming system including a gaming display device 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the game system according to the present embodiment is constructed in a game hall such as a so-called pachinko parlor. and devices 4, which are connected as shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, a card is used as an example of a "storage medium", but it is not limited to this. It shall include everything applicable to the invention.

In addition, in the present embodiment, banknotes are used as an example of "money", but the present invention is not limited to banknotes, coins, coins, etc., which can be applied to the invention according to the present embodiment. shall include

In addition, in the present embodiment, when simply described as "card", it means a membership card lent to a player who becomes a member of an amusement arcade, and a counting card (visitor card) temporarily lent by an amusement arcade. shall include both

In addition, in the present embodiment, when simply described as "balls", it includes both stored balls stored in association with a membership card and counted balls stored in association with a counting card. When described as "ball information", the ball information indicating the stored balls (hereinafter referred to as "stored ball information") and the ball information indicating the counted balls (hereinafter referred to as "counted balls information"). ) shall be included. Information indicating the amount of money inserted by the player is referred to as "money information" (also referred to as "balance information"). It is assumed that there is a case. Also, the membership card can separately store the stored ball information, the counted ball information, and the money information. Furthermore, for convenience of explanation, the term "balls" is usually used to indicate information about the game balls owned by the player. Information on medals owned, information on gaming value held by the player by electromagnetic means, and other similar information shall be included.

[Game display device]
A game display device 1 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. A detailed configuration of the game display device 1 will be described later.

The game display device 1 of the present embodiment displays various game information as projection images by a transmissive projector device, and is installed, for example, above each game machine 2 . As the game information, the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired game media or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games played, the game history, and the like are displayed in graphs and numerical values (see FIG. 5). The game display device 1 is provided with a plurality of buttons 14A to 14F (described later) for the player to operate (see FIG. 5). The game display device 1 is connected to the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4, and displays various game information based on input signals, received signals, or player's operations. The images are displayed on screens (projection target portions) 110A to 110F, which will be described later. The game display device 1 may be installed in units of so-called game islands.

The game display device 1 includes, as electrical or optical components, a projector main body 12, which will be described later, and a control unit (not shown) for controlling this. The control unit controls the projector main body 12 and controls communication with the game machine 2 , the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 . Further, when the sensor detects the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F, the control unit controls the display on the screens 110A to 110F according to the operation. Although the physical buttons 14A to 14F are provided in this embodiment, the screens 110A to 110F may be configured by touch panels, and the control unit may detect operations on the touch panels.

The game display device 1 includes an interface unit for communicating with the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4, although not shown. The interface unit and an external connection terminal board (to be described later) in the game machine 2 are connected by a contact input method, and one-way communication from the game machine 2 to the game display device 1 is possible. The interface unit and the game medium lending device 3 are connected by, for example, a harness using a contact input/output method, and two-way communication is possible. Further, the interface unit and the server device 4 are connected by a wired LAN system by, for example, a coaxial cable, and by a contact output system by a harness, so that two-way communication is possible. The connection method is not limited to these methods. For example, a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Additionally, a combination of these schemes may be used.

[Game machine]
The gaming machine 2 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. As the gaming machine 2, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 2a or a pachislot gaming machine 2b is applied. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 2a and the pachislot gaming machine 2b are collectively referred to as the gaming machine 2 unless otherwise specified.

The pachinko game machine 2a is a game in which game balls (game media) are ejected onto the board surface, and when the game balls that hit the nails and flow down irregularly enter a specific winning hole, prize balls are paid out or points are added. is mainly performed. The pachinko game machine 2a includes a main control unit for controlling the main game device, a sub-control unit for controlling performance operations related to display and sound output, and a payout control unit for controlling the payout operation of game balls as prize balls. Equipped with units, etc. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1 via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, or the like each time a game is played or when there is a change in the internal state. output to the display device 1 for Also, this payout control unit is connected to the game ball lending device 3a via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the player's operation.

The pachislot machine 2b rotates a plurality of reels with a plurality of patterns by inserting a coin (game medium) and operating a start lever, and by pressing a stop button corresponding to each reel, the reels are rotated. By sequentially stopping the machines, when the symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination are arranged on the activated line, coins are paid out. Similarly to the pachinko machine 2a, the pachislot machine 2b also has a main control unit for controlling the main game device, a sub-control unit for controlling effects related to display and sound output, and a coin payout operation. A payout control unit or the like is provided. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1 via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, or the like each time a game is played or when there is a change in the internal state. output to the display device 1 for Also, this payout control unit is connected to the medal lending device 3b via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the player's operation.

[Game media lending device]
The game medium lending device 3 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. As the game medium lending device 3, there are a game ball lending device 3a installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 2a and a token lending device 3b installed adjacent to the pachislot gaming machine 2b. In the following description, the game ball lending device 3a and the token lending device 3b are collectively referred to as the game medium lending device 3 unless otherwise specified.

The game medium lending device 3 is connected to the server device 4 via, for example, a switching hub or controller (not shown). When a player inserts a card, the game medium lending device 3 sends identification information such as a card ID and a member ID added to an IC chip or the like of the card (hereinafter simply referred to as "identification information") to the server device. Send to 4. The server device 4 transmits to the game medium lending device 3 the player's ball information stored in association with the received identification information. When there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 4 updates the ball information, and the game medium lending device 3 drives a payout device (not shown) to control the payout of game media. In addition, when the player inserts bills, the balance information corresponding to the amount of the bills (inserted amount) is transmitted to the server device 4 . Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 4 updates the balance information, and the game medium lending device 3 similarly executes game medium payout control.

In addition, the game medium lending device 3 counts the number of inserted game media when the game media are inserted into a counting device (not shown) by the operation of the player or directly from the gaming machine 2, and outputs the counting result. It is transmitted to the server device 4 as the player's counted ball information, and the server device 4 stores the received counted ball information in association with the identification information added to the card. When the card is not inserted, the received counted ball information is stored in association with the identification information added in advance to the counted card stored in the game medium lending device 3.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the server device 4 manages the player's ball information and balance information, but the game medium lending device 3 may manage these information. In addition to adding identification information to the card, a storage area may also be provided, such information may be stored in the storage area, and such information may be managed. The update of this information may be performed by the server device 4 or by the game medium lending device 3 . Further, the ball information may be managed by the game medium lending device 3 or the server device 4, and the balance information may be directly stored in the storage area of the card.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when no card is inserted, the counted ball information and balance information are associated with the identification information pre-added to the count card stored in the game medium lending device 3. Although it is stored, when there is a card return request, the game medium lending device 3 or the server device 4 newly adds identification information to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 3, The newly added identification information may be stored in association with the ball count information or the balance information.

In addition, if the gaming machine 2 is provided with a game ball lending device connection terminal plate (hereinafter referred to as a “rental terminal plate”), the game medium lending device 3 is also connected to this lending terminal plate. Based on receiving a lending request signal, a return request signal, etc. output from the lending terminal board, it transmits a payout request signal to the gaming machine 2, returns the card, and the like.

The game medium lending device 3 is also connected to the game display device 1 via a converter or the like, and receives game information signals, error signals, etc. output from an external connection terminal board provided in the game machine 2. At the same time, the player's ball information is transmitted to the game display device 1 .

[Server device]
The server device 4 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The server device 4 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected not only to the game display device 1 but also to the game medium lending device 3 . The server device 4 stores the managed game result management information (for example, ball payout history information including the past few days, fraud detection information, etc.) and information on the amusement arcade (for example, new machine information, vacant machine information, etc.) for use in the game. Send to the display device 1 .

The server device 4 is also connected to an external management device (not shown) managed by a center operator who is a third party other than the amusement arcade, and stores card identification information, membership information, and player ball information. Send periodically (for example, once a day). The external management device backs up each transmitted information. The server device 4 stops updating the player's ball information when the connection with the external management device is interrupted for a predetermined number of days (for example, 15 days).

In the gaming system as described above, when a player enters a game parlor (game hall), he or she first takes a seat at a desired gaming machine 2 while looking at various information displayed on the gaming display device 1 . Next, if the player is a member of the game parlor, he or she inserts the membership card into the game media lending device 3, and after identity verification (for example, inputting a registered personal identification number, etc.), the server device 4 If the ball information is stored in the game machine 2, the ball is used. is inserted, a lending request is made to receive the lending of the game medium, and the game is started by inserting the game medium into the game machine 2.例文帳に追加Alternatively, if the player is not a member of the game parlor, the player inserts banknotes, makes a lending request, receives the lending of game media, and inserts the game media into the gaming machine 2 to start a game. At this time, the ball information and balance information stored in the server device 4 are updated (decremented) by the rented amount.

In the case where the game is continued without being able to receive the payout of the game media from the gaming machine 2, the ball information and the balance information stored in the server device 4 are updated every time a lending request is made. , are sequentially updated (subtracted) by the rented amount. On the other hand, when it is possible to receive the payout of game media from the gaming machine 2, when the putout game media are put into the game medium lending device 3, the number of put-in game media is counted, and the count result is Based on this, the ball information stored in the server device 4 is updated (added).

After that, when the game on the gaming machine 2 is finished, the player requests the card to be returned. Here, when the membership card is inserted in the game medium lending device 3, the membership card is returned as it is after identity verification (for example, input of a registered personal identification number, etc.). When the membership card is not inserted in the game medium lending device 3, when the server device 4 stores the counted ball information, or when there is the balance information, it is stored in the game medium lending device 3. Return (issue) the counting card. If the server device 4 does not store the counting ball information and there is no remaining amount of the inserted amount, the counting card is not returned (issued).

When the counting card is returned (issued) and the player wants to play a game on another gaming machine 2, the counting card is sent to the game medium lending device 3 provided corresponding to the other gaming machine 2. By inserting the card, the game can be started (replayed) in the same procedure as for the membership card (except for identity verification). In the above case, the replay based on the stored ball information is called "pooled ball replay", and the replay based on the counted ball information is called "ball held ball replay".

[Configuration of game display device]
Next, the configuration of the game display device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game display device 1 includes a housing 10, a screen unit 11A, a projector body (projection means) 12, a reflector 13, and an operation unit 14 as basic components. The housing 10 accommodates a projector body 12, a reflector 13, an operation unit 14, and a control unit (not shown) for controlling the operation of the game display device 1 as a whole. The screen unit 11A is attached so as to cover the opening surface 10A provided on the front side of the housing 10 . 2 to 4 show a standard type screen unit 11A, and unless otherwise specified, this screen unit 11A is basically used for explanation, but any screen unit may be used.

As shown in FIG. 3, the housing 10 is formed in a rectangular box shape having a bottom surface 10a, left and right side surfaces 10b and 10c, a rear surface 10d, an upper surface 10e, and an opening surface 10A on the front side. A projector body 12 is installed on the rear portion of the bottom surface 10a, and an operation unit 14 is installed on the front portion of the bottom surface 10a. A reflector 13 is installed on the upper portion of the back surface 10d.

The screen unit 11A is formed to have a front portion 11a covering the opening surface 10A of the housing 10 and left and right side portions 11b and 11c detachably fixed to the side surfaces 10b and 10c of the housing 10. there is The screen unit 11A has a screen (projection target) 110A provided in the opening 11aa of the front portion 11a, and LED substrates 111 provided on both left and right sides of the rear surface of the front portion 11a, as shown in FIG.

The front portion 11a has an opening 11aa for disposing the screen 110A, a light emitting surface 111a that emits light on the left and right sides of the screen 110A, and an opening 112 for exposing the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 forward. and are provided.

The screen 110A is a transmissive screen that displays a projected image from behind. , translucent or grayish. The screen 110A of the screen unit 11A is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Such a screen 110A has a uniformly flat incident surface 1100 (FIG. 4) on the rear side on which the light projected from the projector main body 12 is incident, and the light incident on the incident surface 1100 is transmitted to form a projected image. and a front display surface 1101 (FIG. 3) onto which is projected. The screens 110B and 110C of the other screen units 11B and 11C have the same incident surface 1100 as the screen 110A of the screen unit 11A, but have a different display surface 1101, which will be described later. .

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the light emitting surface 111a is made of a translucent plate-like member, and the LED substrate 111 is provided on the back side thereof. The LED board 111 mounts a plurality of LEDs (not shown) and is connected to the control unit on the housing 10 side via a connector 111A and a cable 111B. Although FIG. 4 shows a connector 111A and a cable 111B corresponding to one LED board 111, the other LED board 111 is also provided with a connector and a cable, and the other LED board 111 is also provided with a connector. and connected to the control unit via a cable.

This control unit turns on or blinks a plurality of LEDs on the LED substrate 111, and the light from these LEDs is emitted forward through the light emitting surface 111a. Note that the other screen units 11B and 11C are not provided with a light emitting section, which will be described later.

The light-emitting surface 111a is composed of a translucent plate-like member, but is not limited to this, and is composed of a member that is at least partially translucent and partially non-translucent. You may do so.

In the translucent part, a decorative sheet may be placed between the LED substrate and the plate-shaped member, or the plate-shaped member itself may be decorated with a translucent color. . In such a case, the LED substrate functions as a light emitting means having a light source, while the plate member functions as a decorative member decorated with the light emitting means. Those with properties such as polarization, refraction, reflection, etc. are applied.

The projector main body 12 projects light for displaying game-related information as a projection image on the screen. Registered trademark: Digital Light Processing) method is applied.

The projector main body (projection means) 12 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and its operation is controlled by this control unit. The projector main body 12 has a liquid crystal panel or a DMD element, an LED or a lamp as a light source, a dichroic mirror, a projection lens, and the like. The projection lens is adjustable along the optical axis.

Such a projector main body 12 is arranged so that the light emitted from the projection lens is directed directly to the reflector 13 . When the screen units 11A to 11C are attached, the focus can be adjusted by finely adjusting the projection lens of the projector main body 12 in the optical axis direction. As a result, a clear projected image that is accurately focused can be displayed on any of the screens 110A to 110C of the screen units 11A to 11C.

The reflector 13 is made of a member that reflects light, and reflects the light incident from the projector main body 12 toward the opening surface 10A of the housing 10 (incident surface 1100 of the screen 110A). It is installed on the rear surface 10d in an inclined posture with respect to 10A.

The operation unit 14 has a plurality of buttons 14A to 14F arranged horizontally that can be operated by a player or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the operation unit 14 is provided with a switch button 14A, a history button 14B, a call button 14C, a setting button 14D, a confirmation button 14E, and a cross button 14F in this order from the left. there is The operation unit 14 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and when an operation of each button 14A to 14F is detected by a switch (not shown), a detection signal is supplied from the switch to the control unit, and the control unit responds to the detection signal. Display control is performed accordingly.

The switch button 14A is a button for switching between graph display and numerical display, which will be described later. The history button 14B is a button for displaying today's game history. The call button 14C is a button for calling a store clerk at the game arcade. The setting button 14D is a button for changing display settings and the like. The confirm button 14E is a button for confirming various settings. The cross button 14F is a button for changing numerical values and performing scroll operations.

As exemplified in FIG. 5, as the projection image V1 on the screen 110A, a chart image showing the number of medals obtained from the start of the game is displayed as a line graph. As the projected image V2, a text image indicating the number of bonus games played today and the cumulative number of games is displayed.

As the projected image V3, a text image showing the number of past bonuses and the cumulative number of games as a history is displayed. The surface on which light is incident is assumed to be the incident surface 1100, but the surface on which light is projected (display surface) may be the rear area of the LED substrate 111 or areas above and below the incident surface 1100 (front portion 11a, etc.). Furthermore, the left and right regions (side portions 11b and 11c) may also be included.

The surface onto which the light is projected in this manner may be included inside the screen unit as long as the projected image can be projected in an area in front of the projector main body 12 or in front of the reflector 13 .

<Second embodiment>
Next, a game display device according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same or similar components as in the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the game display device 1 according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the entire front surface of the screen unit 11D is composed of a concave screen 110D, and the entire front surface side of the screen 110D is gently inclined. The display surface 1101 has a concave surface. The game display device 1 does not have a light-emitting surface and buttons.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, an LED substrate 60 and a reflector 61 are provided outside the rear surface 10d of the housing 10, which is the rear surface side of the reflector 13. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 60A are mounted on the LED substrate 60 so as to be positioned annularly with respect to the back surface 10d, and the LEDs 60A are arranged so that light can be emitted toward the reflector 61. As shown in FIG. Such light from the LEDs 60A is reflected by the reflector 61, thereby illuminating the periphery of the game display device 1 and the periphery of the screen 110A from behind.

According to such a game display device 1, a projected image can be projected on the entire display surface 1101 of the screen 110D, and the decoration effect can be enhanced by the light from the rear by the LEDs 60A.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the screen 110D is formed in a concave shape, a three-dimensional image with depth can be displayed. This can further enhance the visual effect and decorative effect.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a game display device according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the third embodiment, for example, the upper edge of the concave screen 110D shown in FIG. 6 is illuminated to improve the visual effect and decorativeness.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game display device 1 according to the third embodiment includes a screen 110D having an incident surface 1100 (light guide section) having a predetermined thickness and transmitting light, and a projection image having a predetermined thickness. It is composed of a display surface 1101 (display unit) for displaying. At least one substrate (LED substrate) 70 is installed on the bottom surface 10a of the housing 10 near the lower edge of the screen 110D, and light is directed to the upper edge of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100 of the screen 110D. A diffused reflection portion 72 is provided which is composed of an uneven portion or the like for diffused reflection.

The irregular reflection portion 72 is provided over the entire upper edge of the screen 110D. Further, the substrate 70 may be provided over the entire lower edge of the screen 110D, or may be provided by dividing it appropriately. In addition, the arrangement position and emission angle of the one or more light emitting elements 71 are appropriately adjusted so that the light from the light emitting elements reaches the entire irregular reflection portion 72 uniformly.

As a result, horizontally elongated reflected light that borders the upper edge of the screen 110D is formed, and the visual effect and decorative effect can be improved. Although the LED substrate 60 and the reflector 61 are provided on the back surface of the reflector 13 in the diagram shown in FIG. 8, these can be omitted as appropriate.

In order to prevent the light from the light emitting element 71 from leaking through the gap between the substrate 70 and the bottom surface 10a, a light shielding member 73 is installed in the gap to prevent the light from leaking to the housing 10. FIG.

Furthermore, a light shielding member may be appropriately provided around the light emitting element 71 so that the light from the light emitting element 71 is not directed toward the display surface 1101 of the screen 110D.

According to the third embodiment, light emitted from the light-emitting elements 71 of the substrate 70 provided near the lower edge of the screen 110D is emitted so as to frame the upper edge of the screen 110D, thereby providing a game display device. 1 visual effect and decorativeness can be improved. Moreover, by preventing leakage of light from the light-emitting element 71 to the inside of the housing 10, the irradiation efficiency is increased and the image projected onto the screen 110D is not affected. Further, the substrate 70 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge, the left edge and/or the right edge of the screen 110D, and the irregular reflection portion 72 is provided at the lower edge and the right edge of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100 so as to face each of them. It may be provided on the edge and/or on the left edge. Thereby, each edge (upper edge, lower edge, right edge and/or left edge) of the screen 110D can be appropriately illuminated.

(Modification 1) In modification 1, as shown in FIG. 9, a light shielding function is provided to prevent light from the light emitting element 71 from leaking into the housing 10 through the gap between the substrate 70 and the bottom surface 10a. The bottom surface 10a is deformed so as to close the gap. As a result, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

(Modification 2) In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 10, a substrate 70 having a light shielding function is arranged in the vertical direction, and the substrate 70 itself prevents the light from the light emitting element from leaking into the housing 10. To prevent. As a result, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the third embodiment, and to reduce the number of parts.

Note that the LED substrate 60 and the reflector 61 can be omitted as appropriate in the first and second modifications as well.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a game device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a gaming device G1 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11, the gaming device G1 has a housing G10 and a screen unit G11 composed of a screen G110 whose entire front surface is concave. The housing G10 has a base G101 and a projector housing G102.

FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming device G1. As shown in FIG. 12, the base body G101 has a flat plate-like back surface part G101a and a bottom surface part G101b, which form the rear wall and the bottom wall of the housing G10, respectively. The projector main body 12 is mounted on the bottom surface portion G101b. Moreover, the reflector 13 is arranged along the inner wall of the back surface portion G101a.

The projector housing G102 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector main body 12, thereby housing the projector main body 12 in the internal space. The internal space is open at the top so that the image light emitted from the projector main body 12 can reach the reflector 13 arranged on the rear part G101a. The screen unit G11 is attached so as to cover the reflector 13, and is configured so that the image light reflected by the reflector 13 is applied to the screen G110.

As described above, the game device G1 of the fourth embodiment is a game display device that functions as a transmissive projector device, as in the above-described embodiments, but is not limited to this. For example, the game device may be a game display device with a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Also, the game device is not limited to a game display device, and may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine, or the like.

In the following description of the fourth embodiment, for convenience, the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the back surface portion G101a may be referred to as the front-rear direction. In the longitudinal direction, the screen unit G11 side of the rear portion G101a may be referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the game device G1, and the opposite side to the front side may be referred to as the rear side (backward direction, depth direction). The right and left sides of the game device G1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction), respectively, and the direction including the right side and the left side is sometimes referred to as the left and right direction. Furthermore, the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction may be referred to as the up-down direction or the height direction.

FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, a light guide plate G61 is arranged behind the rear surface portion G101a of the substrate G101 so as to be parallel to the rear surface portion G101a. That is, the light guide plate G61 is arranged parallel to the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The light guide plate G61 is translucent and is capable of guiding incident light. In the fourth embodiment, the light guide plate G61 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate, but is not limited to this, and may be in any shape such as circular. As shown in FIG. 13, the light guide plate G61 is fixed to the base G101 by a rear substrate cover G62.

The gaming device G1 is generally arranged above the gaming machine 2, with the screen G110 facing the face of the player with the screen G110 facing downward from the front. be done. At this time, it is preferable that the light guide plate G61 is configured at a position and/or size that allows the player to view the light guide plate G61 above the screen G110.

FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 14, the light guide plate G61 has an annular opening G61a formed to penetrate in the thickness direction. That is, the light guide plate G61 has an annular end face (opening side end face G61b) on the opening G61a side. In other words, the opening-side end surface G61b forms the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the opening G61a is formed in an annular shape, but is not limited to this, and may be in a rectangular shape or the like. A part of the peripheral edge of the opening G61a may match the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. That is, the opening G61a may be formed by providing a notch in the light guide plate G61.

An LED substrate G60 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the light guide plate G61 and the substrate G101. That is, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on an LED substrate G60 that is separate from the light guide plate G61. A plurality of LEDs G60A are mounted on the LED substrate G60 at positions facing the opening-side end face G61b on the light guide plate G61 side. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged side by side at equal intervals along the opening-side end face G61b on the LED substrate G60 so as to surround the opening G61a. In addition, when the opening G61a is formed by a notch, the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged in an arc shape along the notch. Each LED G60A has an emission port in the direction facing the opening-side end surface G61b. Therefore, the LED substrate G60 radially emits light from the plurality of LEDs G60A toward the opening-side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. In addition, the optical axis of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A is parallel to the light guide plate G61, and the light incident on the light guide plate G61 travels through the light guide plate G61 and constitutes the periphery of the light guide plate G61. It is made possible to reach the outer end face G61c. The thickness of the light guide plate G61 is set longer than the length of the LED G60A in the front-rear direction. This prevents the rear substrate cover G62 that fixes the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LEDs G60A located in the openings G61a of the light guide plate G61.

In this way, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A arranged in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61 is guided through the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening-side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, and is guided to the outside of the light guide plate G61. Illumination is performed so as to cover the entire area of the end surface G61c. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially within the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end face G61c, thereby illuminating the entire circumference of the light guide plate G61 in a ring shape, thereby enabling the gaming device G1. The illuminated light guide plate G61 can be visually recognized from any direction, and the identification of the gaming machine or the like to which the gaming device G1 is attached can be improved.

The LED substrate G60 is capable of individually controlling the lighting of a plurality of LEDs G60A. The LED board G60 has a memory (not shown) storing a plurality of lighting patterns, and controls the plurality of LEDs G60A with lighting patterns according to external signals and the like. For example, the LED board G60 selects a lighting pattern corresponding to a signal indicating a gaming state transmitted from the gaming machine or an operation performed on an input device (not shown) of the gaming device G1, and A plurality of LEDG60A are controlled based on the lighting pattern. For example, by controlling a lighting pattern in which a plurality of LEDs G60A are sequentially turned on in the order of arrangement, it is possible to create a driving effect in which light flows along the periphery of the light guide plate G61. In addition, by selecting full-color LEDs for the plurality of LEDG60A, when a call input from the player is performed by operating a touch sensor, etc., which will be described later, it lights up in red, and when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, it flashes in yellow. It is possible to perform various notifications such as.

The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing at a plurality of locations to reflect part of the light from the LED G60A in the light guide plate G61 in the thickness direction of the substrate G101 side. The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing so as to form a shape having a design, so that the illumination of the shape appears on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. Hereinafter, the reflection processing of the light guide plate G61 will be specifically described with reference to the optical path pattern of light traveling through the light guide plate G61.

15A and 15B are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from the LED G60A traveling through the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the optical path of the light from the LED G60A is not subjected to reflection processing, the light emitted from the LED G60A enters the light guide plate G61 from the opening-side end surface G61b and passes through the light guide plate G61 in the planar direction. It advances (in the vertical direction) and reaches the outer end surface G61c. As a result, the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 is annularly illuminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15B, the light guide plate G61 has a reflecting portion G61d that reflects light traveling in the surface direction (vertical direction) of the light guide plate G61. In the fourth embodiment, the reflecting portion G61d is a depression formed in the main surface of the light guide plate G61 on the side opposite to the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d has a reflecting surface whose normal is inclined 45 degrees in the thickness direction (forward direction) with respect to the optical path of the light from the LED G60A. direction) toward the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d may be provided inside the light guide plate by processing such as laser processing.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an illumination mode of the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 16, light is radially emitted from the LED G60A (see FIG. 14) arranged in the opening G61a, reaches the outer end face G61c, and illuminates the periphery of the light guide plate G61. Part of the light from the LED G60A (see FIG. 14) is reflected forward by the reflecting portion G61d to form a bright spot on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflective parts G61d are collectively provided so as to form a design, so that the bright spots formed by the reflections of the reflective parts G61d stipple the design.

FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 17, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on an LED substrate G60 that is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are provided with alignment portions G60e and G61e for alignment so that the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged at positions facing the opening-side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. are provided respectively.

Specifically, the alignment portions G60e are four through holes that are provided at four corners of the light guide plate G61 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The alignment portion G61e is four through holes penetrating corresponding to the four alignment portions G60e. A rear substrate cover G62 sandwiching the light guide plate G61 with the LED substrate G60 is similarly formed with an alignment portion G62e.

A rear surface portion G101a of the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for performing alignment in cooperation with the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61. The alignment member G101e has a cylindrical shape with a cross section that engages with the alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e, and is longer than the combined thickness of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear substrate cover G62. It is provided so as to protrude backward from the base G101.

In this manner, the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear substrate cover G62 are detachably arranged with respect to the base G101. The alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear substrate cover G62 are sequentially inserted into the alignment member G101e of the substrate G101 for alignment.

When the light guide plate G61 is aligned, first, the alignment portion G61e of the light guide plate G61 is aligned with the projecting end portion of the alignment member G101e of the base G101 and inserted. The light guide plate G61 is moved forward while being restricted from moving vertically and horizontally by the alignment member G101e, and placed on the LED substrate G60. In this way, the light guide plate G61 is restricted only to movement in the front-rear direction by the alignment member G101e. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LEDs G60A placed on the LED substrate G60 during alignment.

(Outline of the fourth embodiment)
As described above, the game device G1 of the fourth embodiment is detachably arranged on the base G101, and has a translucent light guide plate formed so that the opening-side end surface G61b having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction. G61, and a plurality of LEDs G60A arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged side by side along the opening side end surface G61b. The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing for reflecting part of the light guided into the light guide plate G61 from the plurality of LEDs G60A through the opening-side end surface G61b in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. is formed on the reflecting portion G61d.

According to the above configuration, light from the plurality of LEDs G60A arranged in the opening of the light guide plate G61 is guided through the light guide plate G61 after entering from the opening-side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. is illuminated so as to cover the entire region of the outer end surface G61c of the . On the other hand, part of the light guided through the light guide plate G61 by the reflection processing applied to the light guide plate G61 is emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61 by the reflection portion G61d subjected to the reflection processing. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially within the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end face G61c, thereby illuminating the entire circumference of the light guide plate G61 in a ring shape, thereby enabling the gaming device G1. The illuminated light guide plate G61 can be visually recognized from any direction, and the identifiability of the gaming machine to which the gaming device G1 is attached can be improved. Furthermore, the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61 can improve the design, and since the light guide plate G61 is detachable from the base G101, the light guide plate G61 can be replaced with a light guide plate G61 having a different reflective design. Therefore, the gaming device G1 can be applied to various types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the gaming device G1 of the fourth embodiment, the plurality of LEDG60A are provided on the LED substrate G60 which is separate from the light guide plate G61, and the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are configured such that the plurality of LEDG60A Alignment portions G60e and G61e for alignment are provided so as to be arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b of the light plate G61.

According to the above configuration, the detachably arranged light guide plate G61 is arranged by the alignment portions G60e and G61e such that the plurality of LEDs G60A are positioned to face the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61. be. As a result, the alignment parts G60e and G61e perform accurate alignment, so that it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visual effect due to misalignment.

In addition, in the game device G1 of the fourth embodiment, the substrate G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for performing alignment in cooperation with the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61. ing.

According to the above configuration, the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 cooperate with the alignment member G101e provided on the base G101, and alignment is performed. As a result, the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are aligned and also aligned with the base G101, so that it is possible to further prevent deterioration of the visual effect due to misalignment.

In addition, in the game device G1 of the fourth embodiment, the shape of the opening G61a is ring-shaped, and the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged in a ring along the opening-side end surface G61b of the ring-shaped opening G61a.

According to the above configuration, the plurality of LEDs G60A are annularly arranged along the opening-side end surface G61b of the annularly formed opening G61a. As a result, the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged in an annular shape along the opening-side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, thereby minimizing the number of LEDs G60A and allowing the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A to pass through the light guide plate G61 more efficiently. It is possible to make the outer end surface G61c of the light guide plate G61 more effectively illuminate.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a game device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In the fifth embodiment, a different aspect of the projector container G102 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) explained in the fourth embodiment will be explained, and the rest of the configuration and the like are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted. do.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the projector housing F102 included in the gaming device F1 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18, the projector housing F102 is attached to the base G101 below the screen unit G11 so as to cover the projector main body 12 (see FIG. 12), thereby housing the projector main body 12 in the internal space. As in the fourth embodiment, the upper part of the internal space is open so that the image light emitted from the projector main body 12 can reach the reflector 13 arranged on the rear part G101a. Further, the projector housing F102 of the fifth embodiment has the function of an input device for receiving inputs from the player and the function of notifying the player. The projector container F102 will be specifically described below.

The projector housing F102 has an exterior panel F1021 that forms the front contour of the projector housing F102. The exterior panel F1021 has a touch area F1021a, a speaker section F1021c, and a light receiving section F1021d.

The touch area F1021a is a rectangular input area set according to the shape of a touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. The touch region F1021a is provided with a translucent portion F1021b having translucency so that light emitted from the back side can be transmitted. In the fifth embodiment, the light-transmitting portion F1021b is composed of a rectangular design representing the touch area F1021a, and a pattern representing a "hand" and a text representing "CALL" arranged in the rectangular design. is not limited to In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the exterior panel F1021 is made of a translucent material and is printed with non-transmissive ink so as to leave the translucent portion F1021b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed by providing a translucent material so as to be flush with the exterior panel F1021, or it may simply be a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021. Further, the translucent part F1021b may be formed by forming a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021 and then providing an optical sheet (optical film) for diffusely reflecting light on the back side.

The speaker portion F1021c is a through hole for outputting sound from a speaker F10253 (see FIGS. 19 and 20) to the outside. Further, the light receiving portion F1021d is an input device for receiving signals by infrared rays or the like from the outside.

FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 19, the projector housing F102 includes the exterior panel F1021 described above, the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024 provided on the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023, the substrate F1025, and the frame. It has a body F1026 and a housing base F1027.

The housing base F1027 forms the outer shape of the projector housing F102 together with the exterior panel F1021, and houses the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024, and the substrate F1025 between the housing base F1021 and the exterior panel F1021. Further, the housing base F1027 is provided with a light receiving element for receiving an optical signal from the outside by the speaker and the light receiving unit F1021d described above. The projector main body 12 (see FIG. 12) is accommodated on the opposite side of the housing base F1027 from the exterior panel F1021. Further, the housing base F1027 is provided with a speaker F10253 for outputting sound from the speaker section F1021c on the upper left part of the front side.

The substrate F1025 has a function of receiving inputs from the touch sensor F1022 and the light receiving portion F1021d and a function of controlling lighting of the LED array F1024.

The LED array F1024 is an LED unit in which a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in parallel, and emits planar light from the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023 toward the light guide plate F1023. The light guide plate F1023 is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022, and the light from the LED array F1024 is reflected by a reflective sheet provided on the rear side of the light guide plate F1023 and is provided on the front side of the light guide plate F1023. Surface light is emitted from the diffuser sheet. That is, the light guide plate F1023 has a function of guiding the light from the LED array F1024 toward the translucent portion F1021b of the exterior panel F1021 provided on the front side via the touch sensor F1022. As a result, the translucent portion F1021b having translucency is illuminated.

The touch sensor F1022 has translucency, and is arranged on the back side of the exterior panel F1021 so as to correspond to the touch area F1021a. As a result, the touch sensor F1022 can detect the player's touch input to the touch area F1021a.

The touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023 on which the LED array F1024 is arranged, and the substrate F1025 are attached to the frame F1026, and are attached to the central portion of the housing base F1027 on the exterior panel F1021 side.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 20, the board F1025 has a control circuit F10250, a ROM F10251, a RAM F10252, and a communication interface F10254. The control circuit F10250 has a CPU and a circuit for controlling the LED array F1024 and the speaker F10253. The ROMF 10251 stores lighting patterns and the like for controlling the lighting of the LED array. The RAMF 10252 temporarily stores input information and the like from the outside. The communication interface F10254 is for communicating with, for example, the LED board G60 (see FIG. 14) in addition to the gaming machine 2 (see FIG. 1). Communication from the gaming machine 2 may be performed via the LED board G60 or a control board (not shown) that controls the LED board G60. Also, instead of directly receiving the signal from the game machine, the signal may be indirectly received from another device such as a server or a controller in the game hall.

Thus, the substrate F1025 is configured to be able to change the illumination of the translucent portion F1021b based on information from the touch sensor F1022 and the game machine 2. FIG. In addition, since it is connected to the LED board G60 for illuminating the light guide plate G61 arranged on the back surface of the game device G1, for example, the illumination of the translucent part F1021b and the illumination of the light guide plate G61 are synchronized. It is possible to perform various productions and notifications.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart of control processing executed by the control circuit F10250. The operation of the control circuit F10250 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 21, first, the control circuit F10250 determines whether or not there is an input (S1). The input includes input to the touch sensor F1022 by the player and input of a signal indicating the game state from the gaming machine 2 . If there is no input (S1: NO), step S1 is executed again. Note that there may be control processing when there is no input. For example, as long as there is no input to the touch sensor F1022, the light transmitting portion F1021b (LED array F1024) may continue to be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

If there is an input (S1: YES), the control circuit F10250 determines the input type (S2). After that, the control circuit F10250 determines the control target (S3). That is, the control circuit F10250 selects the actuator to be controlled according to the input type. The actuator includes LED array F1024, speaker F10253, and multiple LEDs G60A of LED substrate G60. That is, the ROM F 10251 stores a data table in which actuators to be controlled are associated with input types, and the control circuit F 10250 refers to the data table to obtain actuators corresponding to the input types.

Then, the control circuit F10250 selects a control pattern that predetermines how to control the actuator (S4). That is, the ROM F 10251 stores a data table in which actuator control patterns corresponding to input types are associated, and the control circuit F 10250 refers to the data table to obtain the control pattern for each actuator.

After that, the control circuit F10250 controls the actuator with the selected control pattern (S5), and ends the process. Specifically, when there is an input from the player to the touch sensor F1022, control is performed to change the lighting mode of the translucent part F1021b (LED array F1024) to a predetermined pattern. When controlling a plurality of LEDs G60A according to an input to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 transmits a control signal to the LED board G60 or to a control board that controls the LED board G60. to control LED G60A.

Further, when the player performs a touch operation, the control circuit F10250 causes the LED board G60 and/or the projector control means to emit light from the LED G60A in a predetermined manner and/or displays a predetermined image on the screen G110. You may instruct them to do so. When the control circuit F10250 issues a light emission instruction to the LED board G60, not only the translucent portion F1021b of the touch area F1021a in front of the player and the screen G110, but also the light guide plate G61 larger than the main body visible from the side of the gaming machine. lights up in a predetermined manner (e.g., red lighting), the gaming machine being called (the gaming machine to which the gaming device G1 for which the call input is performed by the player is attached) is specified by the manager of the gaming facility. easier. In addition, when the game hall manager arrives at the called game machine, the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a) is normally turned off by operating the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a). The lighting mode may be changed. For example, the control circuit F10250 causes the LED G60A to turn red at the timing of the player's operation, change to red flashing 30 seconds after the player's operation timing, and 1 minute after the player's operation timing. After that, it may be controlled to change to red blinking at a higher speed than before. As a result, even if the game hall manager is away from the gaming machine, it is possible to determine the time from the timing when the player operated it at a glance, and even if there are multiple gaming machines being called, the priority order of correspondence can be attached, it is possible to provide an appropriate service to the player.

In this manner, the control circuit F10250 performs control to change the lighting mode of the LEDs G60A, which are the plurality of light sources for the light guide plate G61, when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a. Further, the control circuit F10250 performs control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs G60A according to the elapsed time from the timing of the touch input to the touch area F1021a. Here, changing the lighting mode includes changing the lighting state from a non-lighting state and changing a certain lighting state to a specific lighting state. In addition, the change in the lighting mode of the LED G60A may intermittently change at each predetermined timing as described above, or may change continuously according to the elapsed time (gradual color change, The blinking interval may gradually change). Further, the control of the plurality of LEDs G60A based on the touch input to the touch area F1021a is limited to being performed by sending an instruction signal from the control circuit F10250 to the LED substrate G60 and/or the projector control means, as described above. not. For example, the control circuit F10250 may directly control the plurality of LEDG60A by configuring the gaming device F1 so that the plurality of LEDG60A are connected to the control circuit F10250.

(Outline of the fifth embodiment)
The gaming device F1 of the fifth embodiment includes an exterior panel F1021 provided with a translucent portion F1021b having translucency in a touch area touched by a player, and a rear side of the exterior panel F1021 having translucency. A touch sensor F1022 provided in association with the touch area F1021a to detect a touch input to the touch area F1021a, an LED array F1024, and an LED array F1024 provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022. and a control circuit F10250 for controlling lighting of the LED array F1024.

According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player on the touch area F1021a, the touch sensor F1022 detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control circuit F10250 is turned on by controlling the lighting of the LED array F1024, and the light from the LED array F1024 is guided to the transparent portion F1021b, so that the player can visually recognize the light from the transparent portion F1021b. becomes. With such a configuration, the translucent portion F1021b in the touch area F1021a of the exterior panel F1021 is illuminated by the light from the LED array F1024, so that the player can easily recognize the place to be touched, and furthermore, the conventional call button can be used. It is not a movable type, and input is performed on the touch area F1021a formed on a plane, so it is possible to prevent failures due to dust entering the operating parts and failures due to fatigue of the moving parts. Become.

In the gaming device F1 of the fifth embodiment, the control circuit F10250 performs control to change the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his/her own touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 that illuminates the translucent portion F1021b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area F1021a many times and deteriorating the surface of the touch area until the attendant is called.

In the game device F1 of the fifth embodiment, a translucent light guide plate G61 is detachably disposed on a base G101 and has an opening-side end face G61b of a predetermined shape penetrating in the thickness direction; A plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged so as to be arranged side by side along the opening side end surface G61b. In the light guide plate G61, a part of the light guided into the light guide plate G61 from the plurality of LEDs G60A through the opening-side end face G61b is reflected in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. A portion G61d is formed, and the control circuit F10250 may perform control to change a plurality of LEDs G60A to a specific lighting mode when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A becomes a specific lighting mode according to the player's touch input, spreads radially in the light guide plate G61, and reaches the outer end surface of the light guide plate G61. , the light guide plate G61 illuminated in a specific lighting mode can be visually recognized from any direction of the game device F1. It becomes easy to specify the game machine to which the separated game device F1 is attached. Furthermore, the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61 can improve the design, and since the light guide plate G61 is detachable from the base, it can be replaced with a light guide plate G61 having a different design and reflective processing. Therefore, the gaming device F1 can be applied to various types of gaming machines.

In the gaming device F1 of the fifth embodiment, the control circuit F10250 may perform control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing of the touch input to the touch area F1021a. good.

According to the above configuration, the manager of the game hall can recognize at a glance even if the game machine is away from the game machine by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate G61 after the timing of the touch input by the player. Even when there are a plurality of game devices F1 to which touch input has been performed, it is possible to give priority to the corresponding devices, so that appropriate services can be provided to the player.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 35. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Also, the game device of the sixth embodiment is a game display device that functions as a transmissive projector device, as in the above-described embodiments, but is not limited to this. For example, the game device may be a game display device with a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Further, in the present embodiment, the game device is a data display machine, but is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine, or the like. may

(machine configuration)
FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the data display machine H1 and game machine H2 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the data display H1 according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 22, the data display machine H1 is individually installed above the gaming machine H2 in the gaming arcade. The data display machine H1 is attached to a mounting portion of a so-called island on which the game machine H2 is installed in association with the game machine H2 (not shown). In the present invention, the game machine H2 is configured to have different effects depending on the game state, and the data display machine H1 is configured to execute a mode of effect corresponding to the effect mode of the game machine H2. That is, the data display machine H1 is configured to detect the game state of the gaming machine H2 based on the presentation mode of the gaming machine H2.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, the game machine H2 has a main body H32 and a base door H33 pivotally attached to the main body H32 so as to be openable and closable. A top lamp H60 is arranged to form the upper end region of the base door H33. The top lamp H60 has a full-color LED, and is an illumination device that emits light by projecting light from the full-color LED onto a translucent member forming part of the housing of the base door H33. Since the top lamp H60 is provided so as to constitute the upper end region of the base door H33 in this manner, the light emission mode of the top lamp H60 can be visually recognized from the front side, the side side, and the top side of the gaming machine H2. It has become. The top lamp H60 is controlled in the game machine H2 so as to function as a light emitting means for effect that changes the lighting mode according to the game state. The data display H1 also has a container H102 having the same function as the projector container G102 of the above embodiment. Although FIG. 22 shows an example in which a pachinko game machine is provided with a data display machine H1 as the game machine H2, the game machine is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the container H102 has a built-in camera unit H12 capable of imaging the bottom of the container H102 in addition to the same configuration as the projector container G102 of the above-described embodiment. The camera unit H12 has a CMOS image sensor and a control device that controls the sensor. The camera unit H12 is arranged below the container H102 so as to be able to capture an image of at least part of the top lamp H60. That is, the data display machine H1 is individually provided in the gaming machine H2 so that the imaging range of the camera unit H12 includes the top lamp H60. Thereby, the camera unit H12 functions as an image acquiring means for capturing an image including the lighting state of the top lamp H60 by capturing an image of the top lamp H60. Therefore, the data display machine H1 acquires continuous images with the camera unit H12, thereby determining the lighting mode of the gaming machine H2, and can have the function of determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2. That is, the camera unit H12 functions as a lighting mode detection means for detecting the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. Although the camera unit H12 is taken as an example of the lighting state detection means, it is not limited to this, and any device capable of detecting the lighting state of light, such as a sensor, may be used.

In this way, the data display machine H1 is configured to be able to detect the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. As a result, the data display machine H1 can determine the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12. Therefore, the data display H1 can have a function of executing a presentation in accordance with the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12.

The game device has a state detection for detecting the game state of the game machine, and the game machine has an effect device that changes the effect mode according to the game state in order to cause the game device to detect the game state. is not limited to this. For example, the game machine may be provided with a directional speaker that points in the direction in which the game device is installed (upper part of the game machine), and output different patterns of effect sounds according to the game state. As a result, the gaming device can detect the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the detected sound by having a microphone (sound collector). Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the voice is the voice of the device itself based on the volume of the voice detected by the microphone. Further, by using the directional speaker, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the sound is from the gaming machine that the gaming device supports. Further, in order to improve accuracy, the gaming device may be provided with a directional microphone pointing in the direction of the speaker of the gaming machine. As a result, the gaming device can determine the gaming state of the gaming machine regardless of whether there is a wired or wireless data communication path.

(Electrical configuration: game machine)
FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine. The gaming machine H2 includes a main control unit H301a that controls the main device group H303a, a sub-control unit H302a that controls the sub-device group H304a, and a payout control unit H305 that controls the payout device group H306. is connected to the sub-controller H302a by one-way communication, and the main controller H301a and the payout controller H305 are connected so as to be capable of two-way communication. An external terminal board H308a is connected to the payout control unit H305 by one-way communication. The main control unit H301a and the sub control unit H302a each include a CPU, a ROM storing programs and the like, and an RWM storing information about games and effects.

The main device group H303a includes, for example, a starting switch, a count switch, a prize winning switch, a normal electric accessory solenoid, a prize winning solenoid, etc. By controlling these devices, the main control unit H301a It controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 2 . In addition, the main control unit H301a transmits commands corresponding to changes in the game state and the like to the sub-control unit H302a and the payout control unit H305.

The sub-device group H304a has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. In addition, the sub-device group H304a also includes, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a character control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like. The sub-controller H302a controls effects in the gaming machine 2 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main controller H301a.

The payout device group H306 includes, for example, a payout control circuit, a payout ball detection switch, a launch control circuit, a touch switch, etc. The payout control unit H305 controls these based on commands transmitted from the main control unit H301a. or automatically controls the shooting and dispensing of game balls in the gaming machine H2.

Although not shown, the gaming machine H2 has a rental terminal board connected to the payout control unit H305. The game machine H2 is connected to the game medium lending device 3 (see FIG. 1) via a lending terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the player's operation.

In addition, the payout control unit H305 is connected to the data display machine H1 via the external terminal board H308a, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when there is a change in the internal state. to output

Incidentally, referring to FIG. 25, a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine H2 as a pachi-slot machine is illustrated. The gaming machine H2 includes a main control unit H301b that controls a main device group H303b and a sub-control unit H302b that controls a sub-device group H304b. ing. An external terminal board H308b is connected to the main controller H301b for one-way communication. The main control unit H301b and the sub control unit H302b each include a CPU, a ROM storing programs and the like, and an RWM storing information about games and effects.

The main device group H303b includes, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, and the like. It controls the progress of the game in H2. In addition, the main control unit H301a transmits commands corresponding to changes in the game state, etc., to the sub control unit H302b.

The sub-device group H304b has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. In addition, the sub-device group H304b is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a character control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like. By controlling these devices based on the commands received, the effects in the gaming machine H2 are controlled.

The main control unit H301b is connected to the data display machine H1 via the external terminal board H308b, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. each time a game is played or when there is a change in the internal state. do.

Also in the gaming machine H2 as a pachi-slot machine, the main control unit H301b is connected to the game medium lending device 3 via a lending terminal board, and sends a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation. It may be configured to output

(Electrical configuration: data display)
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the data display H1. The data display device H1 includes a camera unit H12, a video display unit H405 exemplified by the projector main body 12 and the screen unit G11, an illumination unit H406 exemplified by the LED G60A, and an audio output exemplified by the speaker F10253. A unit H407, a sensor group H404, a control unit H401, a ROM H402, and a RAM H403. The control unit H401 is composed of a CPU and a control circuit board provided with this, and drives and controls the connected devices.

The ROM H402 stores a control program for realizing the functions of the data display H1. The control unit H401 reads out and executes a control program stored in the ROM H402 to control each component, determines the game state of the game machine H2, and determines the game state (lighting mode) of the game machine H2. It realizes a function etc. to execute the production of the mode according to. Also, the control unit H401 controls communication with the server device H4 and the gaming machine H2.

The sensor group 403 includes the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 19) and the like of the above-described embodiment, and is a plurality of sensors for detecting an operation from the outside on the touch area F1021a (see FIG. 19) and the like of the exterior panel F1021. be. When an operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit H401 controls the display content of the image display unit H405, the light emission mode of the illumination unit H406, and the audio output mode of the audio output unit H407 in accordance with the operation. . When the display screen of the video display unit H405 is to function as a touch panel, the sensor group H403 includes sensors for detecting touch operations on this touch panel.

The communication interface H410 is an interface for communicating with the server device H4 and the gaming machine H2, and is also a conversion module that converts input information into an optimum format when outputting. Although not shown, the communication interface H410 is connected to the game media lending device 3 (see FIG. 1) by a harness using a contact input/output method, and two-way communication is possible. The communication interface H410 and the server device H4 are connected by a wired LAN system through a coaxial cable and by a contact output system through a harness, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface H410 and the external terminal board H308 of the game machine H2 are connected by a contact input method, and one-way communication from the game machine H2 to the data display machine H1 is established. The connection method is not limited to these methods, and each connection may use a wireless LAN method or an optical communication method using an optical cable. Additionally, a combination of these schemes may be used.

The RAMH 403 functions as storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit H401 causes the RAM H403 to store the control result of each connected component. The RAM H403 also stores a data table for determining the game state of the game machine H2 and a data table for executing an effect according to the game state. In this embodiment, the data display H1 can download the data table, the video data, the audio data, and the like used for presentation from the server H4. That is, the control unit H401 downloads the data table for judging the game state of the gaming machine H2 and the data table for executing an effect according to the game state from the server device H4 via the communication interface H410. have a function. That is, the server device H4 has a function of distributing to the data display machine H1 a data table for determining the game state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing an effect according to the game state. For example, the data display H1 may be configured such that the communication interface H410 has a USB connection terminal so that the data table can be transferred from an external storage device or the like to the RAM H403. Further, the data display device H1 may be configured such that the sensor group H404 has an infrared sensor and the data table can be set using a remote controller or the like.

The camera unit H12 is provided for capturing an image of the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2, as described above. When an image including the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 is acquired by the camera unit H12, the control unit H401 determines the game state based on the image and executes an effect according to the game state. The control unit H401 controls the image display unit H405, the illumination unit H406, and the audio output unit H407 to execute effects.

(Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table)
A data table stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. FIG. 27 is a game state determination table for determining the game state. FIG. 28 is an effect pattern table for executing an effect corresponding to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game state determination table has a lighting mode column and a game state column. The lighting mode column stores the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. The game state column stores the game state corresponding to the lighting pattern. The control unit H401 of the data display machine H1 determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 based on the image acquired by the camera unit H12, refers to the game state determination table, and acquires the game state corresponding to the determined lighting mode. do.

Here, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 controlled by the sub-controller H302b of the gaming machine H2 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-controller H302b controls the blinking period of the top lamp H60 to vary within a range that is difficult for humans to recognize, thereby making the top lamp H60 light according to the game state. In this embodiment, the range of flickering cycles that are difficult for humans to recognize is 50 Hz or more, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz, the top lamp H60 repeats a set of lighting and extinguishing every 1/50th of a second. That is, the top lamp H60 is turned on for 1/100th of a second and then turned off for 1/100th of a second, and this cycle is repeated. When the frame rate of the camera unit H12 is 100 fps for the top lamp H60 having such a lighting mode, an image in which lighting and lighting are alternately repeated frame by frame is obtained. In this case, the control unit H401 determines that the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz (repetition of 1/100 second on and 1/100 second off). In this manner, the control unit H401 determines the pattern of lighting and extinguishing of the top lamp H60 by the image recognition program, and identifies the lighting mode (blinking cycle) of the top lamp H60. That is, in this embodiment, the flashing period of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column of the gaming state determination table.

Also, by changing the blinking period of the top lamp H60 without changing the lighting time of one blink, the blinking period is determined by the ratio of the number of images in the lighting state to the number of images captured in a predetermined period. can be

It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the game state is not limited to changing the flashing period of the top lamp H60 within a range that is difficult for people to recognize. For example, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 may be any flashing cycle (for example, flashing at less than 50 Hz), or may indicate the gaming state by changing the emission color. A game state may be indicated by a combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state is determined by the game state determination table, and then the effect pattern corresponding to the game state is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect pattern may be set in association with the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. In other words, the data display machine H1 may be configured so as to be able to execute an effect corresponding to the game state.

The game machine H2 also has a data table similar to the game state determination table in a storage unit (not shown). The gaming machine H2 refers to the lighting pattern in the lighting mode column corresponding to its own game state, and controls the top lamp H60 according to the lighting pattern.

As shown in FIG. 28, the effect pattern table has a game state column, a video display column, an audio output column, an illumination column, and an end condition column. The game state column stores game states to which the gaming machine H2 can be shifted. That is, not only the game state determined based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60 but also the game state directly transmitted from the gaming machine H2 via the external terminal board H308 are stored. The image display field stores image patterns displayed by the image display unit H405 in correspondence with the game state. For example, the image pattern indicates image data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1 or a combination of image data. The voice output column stores voice patterns output by the voice output unit H407 corresponding to the game state. For example, the audio pattern indicates audio data or a combination of audio data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. The illumination column stores an illumination pattern that the illumination part H406 emits light corresponding to the game state. For example, the illumination pattern indicates the lighting pattern of each illumination provided in the game machine H2.

The end condition column stores the end condition of the effect corresponding to the game state. For example, this termination condition is referred to in an error state in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected due to obstruction by the player's hand or luggage after the performance on the data display machine H1 is started, and the termination condition is satisfied. If so, the production is forcibly terminated. Incidentally, if the effect by the data display machine H1 corresponds to a game state that can be determined based on the information transmitted from the external terminal board H308, the termination condition may be omitted.

A specific example of the termination condition stored in the termination condition column will be described. For example, a case where the game state is a BB game state, which will be described later, will be described. Generally, the ON state is maintained at the external terminal board H308 while the gaming machine state is the BB game state. Then, when the end state of the BB game state (for example, when the gaming machine H2 executes payout of more than 300 coins) is satisfied on the gaming machine H2 side, the dedicated terminal is turned OFF. That is, the data display machine H1 can recognize the BB game state from the start to the end from the external terminal board H308. Therefore, the data display machine H1 only needs to stop the effect corresponding to the BB game state when the signal is turned OFF, and there is no need to set a forced termination condition due to an error.

Also, for example, if the gaming state is a special ART gaming state, which will be described later, there is a possibility that the add-on specialized zone, which will be described later, is started immediately after the game started in the ART gaming state. Since it is confirmed that the additional specialized zone will continue for 1G or more, the condition for forced termination of the effect of the special ART gaming state when the start of the special ART gaming state can be detected is 1 game, which is the minimum number of continuous games. The performance time of is the end condition. In the pachi-slot machine of this embodiment, one game interval is set to 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when an error occurs in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected, counting is started and If the (throw-in) signal cannot be detected within 4.1 seconds from the reception of the signal from the external terminal board H308, the effect is terminated. In addition, it may be set to 4.1 seconds from the OUT (payout) signal, or may be set to 4.1 seconds from the timing when the start of the special ART game state is detected, and may be changed as appropriate depending on the corresponding game machine. good too. As an actual operation, on the gaming machine side, an IN (insertion) signal is transmitted from the external terminal board H308 based on the start operation after betting, and the special add-on zone is started. The display unit starts counting after receiving the IN signal, and if a state in which the lighting mode cannot be detected does not occur during that time, the lighting mode changes to the specialized zone after a predetermined number of games (for example, the specialized zone continues for 5G). Change the presentation on the display side when it becomes something other than. On the other hand, if an error that cannot be detected occurs 1 second after the 1G count, the effect will continue at the time of occurrence, and if the error is not resolved even after a total of 4.1 seconds have passed since the start of the count. Change the presentation on the display side. 4. If the error is resolved before 1 second elapses, the special zone production continues.

As described above, it is preferable to set a period of time as the end condition that ensures execution even if an error state such that the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected occurs. That is, when the minimum guaranteed number of games in the game state is fixed, the time obtained by multiplying the number of games by the specified time is set as the end condition, and when the game state ends with a payout of a predetermined amount, It is preferable to divide the predetermined amount by the maximum number of payouts in one game, remove the remainder, set the quotient as the fixed number of games, and multiply the determined number of games by a specified time, and set the end time as the end time.

(Electrical configuration: Data display: External terminal board)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of detailed signals for each terminal transmitted from the external terminal board H308a of the gaming machine H2 in the connection between the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine and the data display machine H1. In FIG. 27, only the connections between the game machine H2 and the data display machine H1 are shown, and other connections to the game medium lending device 3 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 29, from the external terminal board H308a of the gaming machine H2 to the communication interface H410 of the data display machine H1, a "prize ball signal" indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player, "external information 1" signal indicating that the jackpot has been hit or is in the process of being hit, "external information 2" signal indicating that the probability has been changed or is in the process of being hit in the game machine H2, An "external information 3" signal indicating that a special symbol game has started, an "external information 4" signal indicating that a game ball launched from the gaming machine H2 has entered the starting hole, and some error (abnormality) in the gaming machine H2. and a "door/frame open signal" indicating that the base door H33 or the glass door (not shown) of the gaming machine H2 is open. The output contents of the "external information 1" signal to "external information 7" signal can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine H2, which is the transmitting side, and the specifications of the data display machine H1, which is the receiving side. can.

In addition, an "out ball information" signal indicating that a game ball launched in the gaming machine H2 did not enter any winning hole and entered an out hole (not shown) is output by another device (not shown). Based on the detection result of the ball sensor, it is input from another signal line, but when the out ball sensor is controlled by the control of the game machine H2, it is output from the external terminal board H308a of the game machine H2. good too.

Also, from the communication interface H410 of the data display H1 to the server device H4, "out information" based on the "out ball information" signal, "safe information" and "external information 1" based on the "prizing signal" are transmitted. "Big hit information" based on the signal, "probability variation information" based on the "external information 2" signal, "start signal" based on the "external information 3" signal, "starting information" based on the "external information 4" signal, "door "Door open information" based on "frame open signal" and "abnormality 1 information" based on "security signal" are input. Regarding the "security signal", if the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from the output time, "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information", " It may be converted into "abnormality 3 information" or "abnormality 4 information" and output to the server device H4. Further, as will be described later, predetermined information may be added under the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may also receive each signal input from the external terminal board H308a and directly output each input signal to the server device H4 (through signal).

As for the type of error (abnormality) indicated by the "security signal" in the game machine H2, the starter switch is turned on by illegal means or other factors even though no game ball has entered. A start switch error indicating that the count switch has been counted even though the winning opening solenoid is not driven (the winning opening is open) due to illegal means or other factors. , a sensor detection error (for example, magnetic sensor error) indicating that various sensors (for example, magnetic sensor) provided in the gaming machine H2 for fraud prevention are in a detection state.

Referring to FIG. 30, in the connection between the game machine H2 as a pachi-slot machine and the data display machine H1, the details of the signal for each terminal transmitted from the external terminal board H308b of the game machine H2 are illustrated. In FIG. 30, only the connections between the game machine H2 and the data display machine H1 are shown, and other connections to the game medium lending device 3 are omitted.

From the external terminal board H308b of the gaming machine H2 to the communication interface H410 of the data display machine H1, a "medal insertion signal" indicating the number of medals inserted by the player and a "medal insertion signal" indicating the number of medals paid out to the player are sent. "External signal 2" indicating that BB has occurred or is in progress in game machine H2; "External signal 1" that indicates that RB has occurred in game machine H2 or is in RB ', 'external signal 3' indicating that the gaming machine H2 has become ART or is in the process of ART, and 'security signal' indicating that some error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming machine H2. In the game machine H2, the fact that the front door (not shown) is open is input to the data display machine H1 by a "security signal", which is the same as the game machine H2 as the pachinko machine described above. In addition, for example, by outputting the "external signal 4" separately from the "security signal", a signal indicating that the front door is open may be output. It should be noted that the output contents of "external signal 1" to "external signal 4" can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine H2, which is the transmitting side, and the specifications of the data display machine H1, which is the receiving side.

Further, the communication interface H410 of the data display device H1 to the communication interface H410 of the server device H4 is transmitted from the "IN information" based on the "medal insertion signal", the "OUT information" based on the "medal payout signal", and the "external information". "BB information" based on "signal 2", "RB information" based on "external signal 1", "ART information" based on "external signal 3", and "error information" based on "security signal" are input. Regarding the "security signal", if the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from the output time, "error information", "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information”, “abnormality 3 information” or “abnormality 4 information” and output to the server device H4. Further, as will be described later, predetermined information may be added under the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may also receive each signal input from the external terminal board H308b and directly output each input signal to the server device H4 (through signal).

The types of errors (abnormalities) indicated by the "security signal" in the gaming machine H2 include a door open error indicating that the front door is in an open state, and an RWM indicating that reading and writing of RWM were not performed normally. Error, selector error indicating that normal detection is not performed due to illegal means or other factors (e.g. medal jam) in the selector, illegal means or other factors (e.g. medal empty) in the hopper Due to this, a hopper error indicating that normal payout is not performed, and the medal auxiliary storage that stores the surplus medals that could not be stored in the hopper has become full of medals stored in the medal storage. As an example, there is a medal auxiliary box error that indicates that.

In this way, the external terminal board H308 (external terminal boards H308a and H308b) generally employs a parallel transfer method for sending one type of signal for each terminal, so the upper limit of the number of terminals of the external terminal board H308 is limits the number of signals that can be transmitted. Therefore, it is impossible to transmit all game states to which the gaming machine H2 can shift to the data display machine H1. In other words, the game machine H2 is limited to game states to which the game machine H2 can shift (in the case of the above example, the jackpot/probability variable information in the case of a pachinko machine, the BB/RB/ART information in the case of a pachislot machine). ) can be transmitted.

Hereinafter, the game state acquired and determined by being transmitted via such an external terminal board H308 may be referred to as a "first game state". In addition, among game states to which the gaming machine H2 can shift, the gaming machine H2 indicates the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, and the data display machine H1 detects and determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 by the camera unit H12. A game state may be called a "2nd game state." In this embodiment, the "second game state" does not include the "first game state", but the "second game state" may include part or all of the "first game state". .

(Game state)
A game state to which the gaming machine H2 can shift will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a state transition diagram of game states of the gaming machine H2. It should be noted that the case where the game machine H2 is a pachi-slot machine will be mainly described below.

The gaming state in this embodiment is mainly controlled by the main controller H301 (main controller H301a, main controller H301b) of the gaming machine H2. The main control unit H301 determines the transition destination based on a lottery for the internal winning combination. For example, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, winning a specific internal winning combination a predetermined number of times, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, playing a predetermined number of games in the gaming machine H2, and performing a predetermined number of games. For example, a symbol that is determined in advance to win a lottery for shifting to a game state or to shift to a predetermined game state is displayed.

The conditions for ending the game state include winning a predetermined internal winning combination, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, a payout of a predetermined amount in the current game state, and a predetermined amount in the current game state. The game is played the number of times, and a pattern is displayed that is determined in advance to win a lottery for shifting to a predetermined game state or to shift to another game state.

As shown in FIG. 31, the gaming machine H2 has a normal section, a general game state, an RT (replay time) game state, a BB (big bonus) game state, an advantageous section 1, an AT (assist time) game state, and a CZ (chance game state). Zone) game state, ART (Assist Replay Time) 1 game state, Advantageous Section 2, Premium BB (Big Bonus) game state, and ART2 game state are included as possible game states.

(Game state: normal section)
The normal section is classified into a general gaming state, an RT gaming state, and a BB gaming state. That is, the normal section is a game state having a normal game state, an RT game state, and a BB game state.

The normal game state is a game state that is not advantageous compared to other game states. For example, the general gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning combination is low (low replay probability) compared to the RT gaming state. The normal game state shifts to the RT game state when the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination and carried over. In other words, the normal gaming state includes a termination condition that the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination.

The RT game state is started under the condition that the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination and carried over in the normal game state. The RT gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning combination is higher than in the general gaming state (replay high probability). When a bonus is won in the RT game state, the game is shifted to the BB game state. That is, the RT gaming state is terminated when the bonus is won.

The BB gaming state is started by winning a bonus. In the BB game state, the RB game state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts is reached, the state is shifted to the general game state. That is, the BB gaming state has as an end condition that a predetermined number of payouts has been reached. In the RB gaming state, the winning probability of any small winning combination is set to be high.

(advantageous section)
The gaming machine H2 has an advantageous section 1 and an advantageous section 2 as advantageous sections. The advantageous section is a section that can have performance related to the pointing function. The instruction function is a function for notifying the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the internally winning combination is a so-called push-up combination, and is operated in the AT game state and the ART game state.

The advantageous section 1 is divided into an AT gaming state, a CZ gaming state, and an ART gaming state. That is, the advantageous section 1 is a game state having a CZ game state and an ART game state.

The AT game state is transferred to the ordinary game state when winning is won as a result of an AT game transition lottery performed when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the general gaming state includes in the end condition that it is elected in the AT game shift lottery. In addition, the winning probability of the AT game transition lottery is common for all set values. The AT gaming state is shifted to the CZ gaming state after a predetermined number of games are executed. That is, the AT gaming state is terminated when the game is executed a predetermined number of times.

The CZ gaming state is a gaming state that can shift to the ART gaming state. In the CZ gaming state, the upper limit of the number of games is set, and if a specific winning combination is won within the period of the number of games, the state shifts to the ART gaming state. If the maximum number of games is played without winning the specific combination, the advantage section 1 ends with the CZ game state, and the game shifts to the general game state of the normal section. That is, the CZ gaming state is terminated by winning a specific role and completing the upper limit number of games.

The ART gaming state is a gaming state in which the instruction function is enabled similarly to the AT gaming state, and the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning combination is higher than in the AT gaming state. The ART game state is terminated when the game is played a predetermined number of times, and after the game is finished, the game transitions to the normal game state.

The advantageous section 2 is divided into a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state. That is, the advantageous section 1 is a game state having a premium BB game state and a special ART game state.

The premium BB gaming state is started by winning a premium bonus in the normal gaming state. The winning probability of the premium bonus is common for all set values. In addition, although not shown, when the internal winning combination of the premium bonus is carried over, the game state becomes a waiting section until the premium bonus is won, and the shift to the advantage section 2 is awaited. In the premium BB game state, the RB game state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts is reached, the state shifts to the special ART game state. That is, the premium BB gaming state has as a termination condition that a predetermined number of payouts has been reached.

The special ART gaming state is the same as the ART gaming state, but differs in that it has an additional specialized zone in which the number of games can be added. In the special ART game state, when a specific internal winning combination is obtained, a lottery is carried out for each game in which a predetermined number is added to the default number of times of games in which the player enters into an extra special zone. When all the games including the number of games added in the special zone are executed, the advantageous section 2 ends together with the special ART game state, and shifts to the general game state of the normal section. That is, the special ART gaming state is terminated by completing all the games including the added number of times.

Regarding the above-described game state, the transition source game state, the transition destination game state, the start condition, and the end condition are not limited to these. For example, it may be as described below.

A plurality of RT game states are provided, and in addition to the above-described RT state, one of a plurality of types of predetermined replay combinations is won, and a stop operation is performed along a predetermined pressing order according to the winning replay symbols. The RT game state may be entered when a combination of specific replay symbols that are displayed only when the game is displayed is displayed. In that case, the RT state of the bonus carried over may be RT1, and the RT state described above may be RT2. Then, the conditions for shifting to RT2 are that the game is not in RT1, the BB gaming state is not in place, and a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed.

As the advantageous section, the normal state in the advantageous section, the AT gaming state in the advantageous section, and the AT + RT gaming state in the advantageous section (ART gaming state) are provided, and the starting condition of the advantageous section is set to the normal section without a predetermined setting difference or Winning an advantageous section with a set probability, or starting a predetermined bonus, and performing the instruction function related to the winning combination only once in the advantageous section, or winning or instructing any bonus It may be determined in advance whether to play the game according to the function until the completion condition such as completion of the prescribed number of games is satisfied. In that case, if it is decided to win the advantageous section and perform the instruction function related to the winning combination only once, the AT state will be changed, but the instruction function related to the winning combination (for example, the stop operation navigation of the pressing order bell) ) is performed once, it automatically shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, if it is decided to win the advantageous section and to fulfill the end conditions such as the number of instruction functions stipulated for the winning combination and the completion conditions, the AT state is entered, and then a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed. The instruction function may be performed until, for example, 50 games are played, for example, by starting the ART game state when a combination of specific replay symbols is displayed.

Winning a lottery with no set difference or with a set difference before 50 games are played, or by starting a predetermined bonus, rushes into a zone specializing in addition to the number of games added or a set of 50 games. An additional set may be added. It should be noted that the number of ART games may simply be added.

Although the special add-on zone does not send any signal from the external terminal board H308, the special add-on zone is started on the side of the data display H1 by changing the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 to be different from the ART state. can be recognized, and it is possible to collect data such as counting the number of times.

In addition, the AT state in which it is decided to win the advantageous section and perform the instruction function related to the winning combination only once, and the instruction function related to the advantageous section and the winning combination will be performed until the termination conditions such as the completion of the prescribed number of games are satisfied. In the AT state (ART state) in which it is determined that the state is determined, the same display is made on the display device such as the liquid crystal of the game machine, and the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is made different. Although it is unclear whether the process is terminated or executed a plurality of times, the data display H1 side can determine which state it is.

Furthermore, in this example, in the AT state in which it is decided to play until an advantageous section is won and the completion conditions such as the specified number of games for the winning combination are satisfied, the specified replay combination is selected by the instruction function when the predetermined replay combination is won. The stopping order in which the combinations of replay symbols are displayed is reported. By playing the game according to the stop order, the game will shift to the ART state in the advantageous section. The external terminal board H308 turns on an external signal to detect the start of ART for the data display machine H1 when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed. It is conceivable that a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed and a signal is sent from the external terminal board H308 even though no replay has been performed. Even in such a case, in the top ramp H60, it is decided to win the advantageous section and continue until the end conditions such as completion of the instruction function stipulated number of games related to the winning combination are satisfied, and a specific replay symbol is used. By lighting in a lighting mode capable of detecting when a combination is displayed, it is possible to determine whether a specific replay pattern combination was displayed by chance or a specific replay pattern combination was displayed according to an instruction. If the number of ARTs is not added when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed by chance, the number of ARTs can be accurately measured on the side of the data display device H1.

Thus, the number of game states to which the gaming machine H2 can shift exceeds the number of "first game states" that can be transmitted from the external terminal board H308. Therefore, the game machine H2 has a CZ game state, a special ART game state, a special ART game state, except for the "first game state (in this embodiment, the start of the BB game state, the start of the RB game state, and the ART game state)". The top lamp H60 is lit to indicate the special zone and the advantageous section in the state as the second game state, so that the data display machine H1 can grasp the second game state.

The second game state is not limited to the game state determined by the main control unit H301. It may indicate the state of the sub-device group H304. For example, even if the game state is the same, if successively different effects are performed as the number of games progresses, these effects are indicated as different second game states by the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, whereby the gaming machine H2 is displayed. It is possible to perform an effect linked to each effect in the data display machine H1.

Also, in the case of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine, for example, when the holding lamp includes a luminescent color with high reliability of a big hit, or when a predetermined variation time determination table indicates a relatively longer variation than other variations When the time is selected at the time of start winning, the second game state of the look-ahead specialized zone may be indicated by the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 from this time until the big hit determination of the holding lamp is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect on the data display machine H1 in conjunction with the special effect of the look-ahead specialized zone in the game machine H2. Similarly, the execution of a specific effect such as premium reach during special symbol variations in the special symbol game may be indicated as the second game state by the lighting mode of the top lamp H60.

In addition, for example, the gaming machine classified as the second type (so-called feathers) always rotates inside the accessory provided in the center of the game board surface on which the game ball rolls to make a big hit. The position of the prize opening has been changed. If the relationship between the timing at which the game ball enters the entry passage into the inside of the accessory obtained by the sensor and the position of the V prize opening at this timing indicates that there is a high possibility of a big win, this is the second. The game state may be indicated by the lighting mode of the top lamp H60.

(Example of effect display of data display machine)
FIG. 32 shows an effect interlocking with the effect of the game machine H2 by the video display unit H405 when the data display machine H1 detects the lighting state of the top lamp H60 and determines that the game state of the game machine H2 is the CZ game state. It is a figure which shows an example of a display. As shown in FIG. 32, in the CZ game state in which the game machine H2 can shift to the ART game state, the data display machine H1 displays an image indicating that the game machine H2 can shift to the ART game state on the image display portion H405. , an effect linked to the effect (not shown) in the CZ game state executed in the game machine H2 is performed. At that time, on the game machine side, the liquid crystal effect is made to be the same in the ART state and the CZ state, and if the lighting state of the top lamp H60 is also different from each other, which is difficult for the player to recognize, the display side is looked at. You can create meaning.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, by using different display modes for the special zone and the ART state, and between the AT state and the ART state, the data display machine H1 can display a state that is difficult to distinguish from the game machine's presentation mode. It is desirable that the player be able to discriminate by looking at the The state to be compared is not limited to this, and may be any two or more game states that are difficult for the player to distinguish from the presentation mode on the gaming machine side.

In addition, as advantageous intervals, the game machine is provided with an advantageous interval ending only with AT and an advantageous interval that is confirmed to shift to ART. It is also possible to make the determination on the data display side. Furthermore, regarding the so-called premonitory state that expects a transition to an advantageous state over a predetermined number of games, which is difficult to determine on the gaming machine side, a premonition that is premised on transitioning to an advantageous state (this premonition) shifts to an advantageous state. It is also possible to allow the data display machine side to discriminate an omen whose situation is not confirmed (a false omen) by the signal of the second game state.

As described above, the data display machine H1 according to the present invention can be interlocked with a specific effect performed by the gaming machine H2 according to the game state in a specific manner in which the data display machine H1 interlocks with the specific effect. It is configured to be able to have a function of performing production by

(motion)
Effect execution processing executed by the control unit H401 of the data display machine H1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the control unit H401 determines whether or not a signal indicating the gaming state is received from the external terminal board H308 of the gaming machine H2 (S10). When the signal indicating the game state is received (S10: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see FIG. 28) and changes the effect to match the game state indicated by the received signal. Accordingly, counting is started (S11).

After the end of step S11, or when the signal indicating the gaming state is not received in step S10 (S10: NO), the control unit H401 turns on the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 from the image captured by the camera unit H12. It is determined whether or not a mode has been detected (S12). If the lighting mode is detected (S12: YES), the control unit H401 determines whether the lighting mode has changed from the previous time (S13). If the lighting mode has changed (S1: YES), the control unit H401 changes the effect according to the lighting mode (S14), and returns the process to step S10. On the other hand, if the lighting mode has not changed (S13: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current effect (S15) and returns the process to step S10.

If the lighting mode is not detected in step S12 (S12: NO), the control unit H401 determines whether or not a specific lighting mode is being detected (S16). If the specific lighting mode is not being detected (S16: NO), the controller H401 returns the process to step S10. If the specific lighting mode is being detected (S16: YES), the controller H401 detects an error state (S17). Then, the control unit H401 determines whether or not the count value that started counting in step S11 satisfies the termination condition (S18). When the count value satisfies the termination condition (S18: YES), the control unit H401 stops the effect being executed (S19), and returns the process to step S10. On the other hand, when the count value does not satisfy the end condition (S18: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S10.

(Modification 1)
In the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment, not only is the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 set to a blinking period that is difficult for humans to recognize, but the gaming machine H2 executes a continuous effect consisting of a plurality of stages in one game state. In this case, in the lighting mode corresponding to the game state, different flashing cycles are set in association with each of the plurality of stages.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, the blinking period of the top lamp H60 is changed in two stages from 50 Hz to 75 Hz. That is, the game machine H2 changes the blinking period of the top lamp H60 from 50 Hz to 75 Hz in accordance with each of the two stages of continuous effects in this game state. In this way, in one game state, the effect is composed of a plurality of blocks, and the blinking period is set for each block, so that even if the lighting mode is caused by some obstacle (the player's hand or belongings are the top) in the middle of the game state Even if there is a period in which the camera unit H12 cannot detect the lighting state of the top lamp H60 due to the camera unit H12 being placed on the lamp H60, etc., when the data display H1 detects the lighting state again, the data display device H1 will respond to the effect of the corresponding block. It is possible to return to the interlocking performance.

For example, when the game machine H2 outputs a song as sound during BB and displays characters matching the song as an image, and displays lyrics matching the song on the data display machine H1, the game machine H2 displays the song in a plurality of blocks. (For example, A melody, B melody, etc.), and each block is associated with a blinking pattern of a different frequency to control the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. As a result, the data display machine H1 can select and display a lyric image corresponding to the blinking pattern of each block, and detect the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 when it is blocked by the player's hand, luggage, or the like. Even if there is a period during which detection is not possible, it is possible to display appropriate lyrics corresponding to the sound in the game machine H2 when the detection becomes possible again, and perform the interlocking effect again.

When the game machine H2 performs an effect of outputting a tune in the BB game state, an example of the effect of displaying lyrics in accordance with the tune output by the game machine H2 on the data display machine H1 will be given. The effect on the gaming machine side and the effect on the data display side in the BB game state are composed of a series of effect blocks consisting of a plurality of stages. Here, an example of an effect consisting of three stages from the first effect block to the third effect block will be described.

The gaming machine H2 associates a series of first effect blocks to third effect blocks with the elapsed time of the music. For example, the first production block corresponds to the 1st to 30th seconds, the second production block corresponds to the 31st to 70th seconds, and the third production block corresponds to the 71st to 130th seconds. attached. Then, the game machine H2 controls the blinking period of the top lamp H60 to vary according to the elapsed time of the music (each effect block). For example, if the song is the elapsed time of the first effect block, it is lit at a blinking frequency of 50 Hz, and if it is the elapsed time of the second effect block, it is lit at a blinking frequency of 75 Hz, which is the elapsed time of the third effect block. In that case, it is lit at a blinking cycle of 80 Hz. That is, the gaming machine H2 stores a pattern table in which each effect block is associated with an elapsed time and a blinking cycle. The data display machine H1 displays an image in which lyrics are sequentially displayed according to the passage of time for each effect block of the music output from the game machine H2. For example, the data display device H1 displays the lyrics of the A melody in the first effect block when the first effect block is the A melody, and displays the B melody in the second effect block when the second effect block is the B melody. When the third performance block is the chorus, the lyrics of the chorus are displayed in the third performance block. That is, the data display device H1 stores a pattern table in which each effect block is associated with a blinking cycle and an image to be displayed.

When the game machine H2 starts outputting the music in the BB game state, it determines which stage of the performance block it is based on the elapsed time of the music, and controls the lighting of the top lamp H60 at a flashing cycle according to the performance block. do. Specifically, the top lamp H60 is lit at 50 Hz from 1 second to 30 seconds after the start of the song, the top lamp H60 is lit at 75 Hz from 31 seconds to 70 seconds, and the top lamp H60 is lit at 75 Hz from 71 seconds to 130 seconds. At the second second, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 80 Hz. On the other hand, when the data display machine H1 detects that the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2 is blinking at 50 Hz while receiving the BB game state ON signal from the external terminal board H308, it corresponds to the first effect block. The lyrics of the A melody are displayed, and the display of the lyrics of the A melody is continued while the blinking of 50 Hz is detected. Further, when the data display machine H1 detects a change in the blinking period from 50 Hz to 75 Hz, it regards that the B melody has started in the game machine H2, and displays the lyrics of the B melody corresponding to the second effect block, blinking at 75 Hz. is detected, the display of the lyrics of the B melody is continued. Further, when a change in the flashing cycle from 75 Hz to 80 Hz is detected, it is assumed that the chorus has started in the game machine H2, and the lyrics of the chorus corresponding to the third effect block are displayed. continue to display the lyrics of In this way, the data display machine H1 determines the switching of the effect block by detecting the change of the blinking period, and performs the effect corresponding to the next effect block with this as a trigger.

For example, when the data display H1 is displaying the lyrics of the second effect block, if a situation occurs in which the lighting mode of the lamp cannot be recognized due to some kind of failure, the data display H1 will display the lyrics at that time. Abort. After that, even if the obstacle is removed during the performance block and the data display H1 can be detected again in the lighting mode of 75 Hz, the lyrics of the B melody will not be displayed at that time, and the lighting cycle will be changed next time. Display the corresponding lyrics when it can be detected. As a result, when the lyrics of the B melody are resumed, it is possible to prevent the lyrics actually playing on the game machine H2 from being out of sync with the lyrics displayed on the data display machine H1. . Specifically, when there are six lines of lyrics in the B melody, at the timing when the data display machine H1 can be detected again in the lighting mode of 75 Hz, the data display machine H1 outputs the voice of which line of lyrics from the game machine H2. Therefore, even if the lyrics of the B melody are displayed in order from the beginning, there is a high possibility that they will differ from the actual music. Therefore, the data display machine H1 restarts the display of the lyrics at the timing of detecting the change in the blinking period, thereby preventing the deviation between the song output by the game machine and the displayed lyrics, thereby improving the compatibility with the game machine H2. It is possible to execute an accurate interlocking performance. If the BB signal turns OFF before the detection of the lighting mode of the lamp by the camera is restored, the lyric display is also stopped after that.

In the above example, the series of effect blocks in the game machine H2 corresponds to the elapsed time, but it may change according to the progress of the game, and the blinking period may change accordingly. For example, play the A melody during the first 5G, start the B melody when the 6G starts, and play a loop or intro if the lyrics of the A melody are finished before the start of the 6G. can be

(Modification 2)
In Modified Example 2 of the sixth embodiment, as the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, a lighting mode is adopted in which a plurality of emission colors (rainbow colors) are changed in stages, in addition to setting a blinking period that is difficult for humans to recognize. are doing.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 35, lighting modes of the top lamp H60 corresponding to game states 1 to 3 will be described. In game state 1, a lighting mode is set in which the top lamp H60 has a blinking cycle of 50 Hz and emits a single color. On the other hand, when the camera unit H12, which operates at a frame rate of 100 fps, obtains an image in units of frames, an image in which a single color is alternately turned on and off is obtained. Further, in the game state 2, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is set to 50 Hz, and the light emission color is set to sequentially change to five colors each time it is lit. On the other hand, when the camera unit H12, which operates at a frame rate of 100 fps, obtains an image in units of frames, an image is obtained in which lighting and extinguishing that change to five colors are alternately repeated. That is, the control unit H401 of the data display machine H1 determines the gaming state by determining whether or not the number of emitted colors of the top lamp H60 is equal to or greater than a specific number in addition to the blinking period of the top lamp H60. In this way, by adding a change in the light emission color to the lighting mode, it is possible to set effects corresponding to different game states even with the same flashing pattern, and it is possible to further increase the number of effect patterns.

In addition, although FIG. 35 shows only one pattern of "red->orange->green->blue->purple->red-> . . . ," it is not limited to this. For example, this is the first color change mode, and in addition to this, a second color change mode (eg, "red→orange→green→blue→purple→white→red→...") and a third color change mode (eg, , "red→orange→blue→purple→green→red→..."). As a result, a player viewing the gaming machine H2 can recognize the data display machine H1 as a different effect pattern even if the lighting mode is the same rainbow color. For example, if the gaming machine H2 has three types of BB (red 7BB, blue 7BB, and white 7BB, which are different flags), these three types are the first color change mode, the second color change mode, and the third color change mode. It becomes possible to correspond to the color change mode. A player can recognize that BB has been established by visually recognizing the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 whose lighting mode changes to rainbow colors. It is difficult to determine whether However, the data display H1 can determine which BB is established by the color change mode of the top lamp H60, and specify the type of BB that is established. Then, the data display device H1 displays the type of BB such as "BB confirmed! This time it's a red 7BB" based on the determined BB type, thereby appropriately informing the player. It is possible to reduce the medal loss of the player. In this way, by making it possible to identify the establishment of the BB flag, which cannot be determined by a normal data display device, and the type thereof, it is possible to give superiority to other data display devices, and to the pachinko parlor manager. It is possible to have an introduction promoting effect. Also, various conditions such as whether or not to execute notification of the type of BB may be settable. For example, by recognizing a member card inserted into a sandwich or a data display machine, and always notifying if the player is a member, and notifying the visiting player only with a predetermined probability. It can promote membership recruitment of the hall. Needless to say, BB during ART can always be notified, and BB during normal can be notified at a predetermined probability. Further, the rainbow color detection is not limited to BB, and may be set for ART having a plurality of internal advantageous stages, or pachinko jackpot where the amount of balls to be played is not notified when winning. Further, in the above example, the pattern is identified by changing the order of the color components, but the pattern may be identified according to, for example, the color that is not lit among the five colors. Specifically, a pattern that does not include orange (for example, red → green → blue → purple → red → …), a pattern that does not include green (eg, red → orange → blue → purple → red → …), and a pattern that does not include blue A pattern such as a pattern (for example, red->orange->green->purple->red->...) may be provided.

(Modification 3)
Modifications of the light emitting means and the like that change the lighting mode according to the game state will be described. For example, one or more LED lamps may be provided on the upper surface of the gaming machine and detected by the data display. In this case, the game state may be determined by a blinking pattern as in the sixth embodiment, or may be determined by a combination of lighting or extinguishing of a plurality of LED lamps. That is, by providing X number of LED lamps and turning them on or off, it is possible to determine the gaming state of 2 to the Xth power.

When the gaming machine H2 is provided with one predetermined LED, and the data display machine H1 receives the second game state from the LED, the data display machine H1 only needs to be able to capture the image of the LED. is no problem. Further, when the game machine H2 is provided with a predetermined plurality of LEDs and the data display machine H1 receives the second game state from the plurality of LEDs, as described above, the data display machine H1 indicates whether or not the LEDs are lit. It is possible to determine the second game state only by detecting one of these combinations. Thus, in the game machine H2, an LED for communicating the second game state to be driven may be provided separately from the effect. It should be noted that any LED of the top lamp may be used instead of a specific LED. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the gaming machine H2 side, and since it is sufficient if even the top lamp is within the imaging range, the degree of freedom in arranging the data display machine H1 increases.

Further, in order to prevent the influence of ambient light, the light emitting means may be provided on the back side of the upper surface of the game machine, and the lighting mode detection means may be provided on the back side of the data display machine. In addition, it is not limited to only the light emitting means that causes different effects to be executed depending on the game state. In this case, the camera unit is arranged in front of the game machine so that the reel is included in the imaging range. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the pattern of effects on the data display machine, for example, in Modification 2, the interlocking effect is performed only when the light emitting means is rainbow-colored and the reels are performing the freeze effect. It becomes possible. Note that the data display determines whether or not the stopped state of the reels detected by the camera is due to an effect, on the condition that the IN signal is received from the external terminal board. That is, when the data display machine detects the stopped state of the reels with the camera within a predetermined time after receiving the IN signal, the interlocking effect of the reel freeze effect is executed.

Further, when the game machine is started, the light emitting means is lit in a predetermined manner, and the camera unit captures and analyzes the light emitting means that is lit in the predetermined manner to identify the position of the light emitting means in the imaging range, and the game is played. It may improve the determination accuracy of the state.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a game device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table)
FIG. 36 is an effect pattern table for executing an effect corresponding to the game state. The effect pattern table of this embodiment is different from the effect pattern table of the sixth embodiment in that a priority is set for each effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 36, the effect pattern table of this embodiment has a priority column in addition to the same items as the effect pattern table of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, priority is set for all effects in the priority column. For example, based on the signal from the external terminal board H308 and the detection of the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, the same game state is obtained from each, and if different production patterns are set for them, the set priority Which production pattern is to be executed is determined according to the ranking. Specifically, when the BB game state is transmitted from the external terminal board H308 and the premium BB game state is detected from the top lamp H60, the premium BB game state is given priority.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and the second game state may be a game state different from the first game state. That is, the external terminal board H308 may transmit a restricted first game state signal, and the top lamp H60 may indicate the second game state excluding the first game state. In this case, for example, when the normal gaming state is determined as the first gaming state (no signal from the external terminal board H308) and the advantageous section is transmitted as the second gaming state, the advantageous section of the second gaming state is It may be set in the effect pattern table so as to be prioritized. Further, for example, when the BB game state is transmitted as the first game state and the advantageous section is transmitted as the second game state, the effect pattern table is set so that the BB game state of the first game state is given priority. may have been

Also, a modification of the above example will be described. An effect pattern that partially overlaps the effect mode based on the signal of the first game state from the external terminal plate H308 and the effect mode based on the second game state determined by detecting the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. may be stored. Note that "overlapping" means that the same elements are set for the same element in the elements that make up the effect. The elements that constitute the effect are, for example, the color of the lamp, the content of the text displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the presence or absence of characters on the liquid crystal screen, the content of the output from the speaker, and the like. For example, if a character is displayed and the text "A" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen in one effect pattern, and the text "B" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen in another effect pattern, the contents of the text to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen overlaps, and the presence or absence of characters on the liquid crystal screen does not overlap.

Here, when the signal of the first game state and the signal of the second game state are output from the game machine H2 at the same timing, the effect mode based on the first game state is prioritized for overlapping elements in the both effect patterns. However, the non-overlapping part may execute the effect mode based on the second game state. For example, the first game state signal related to the BB game state has an element of displaying a "character" on the liquid crystal image and an element of displaying a text "BB in progress!" on the liquid crystal image. Production patterns are associated. In addition, the signal of the second game state related to the normal BB game state includes the element of displaying the text "BB!" Illumination by the light plate G61) is made to light up in "red". Therefore, when the game machine H2 shifts to the normal BB game state and the data display machine H1 normally receives both the signal of the first game state and the signal of the second game state, first, the first game state is displayed. The effect based on the signal of is given priority, and the liquid crystal image displays "character" and the text "BB in progress!". However, an element that does not overlap with the effect pattern based on the first game state and lights up the lamp on the outer periphery of the data display machine H1 in "red" is effective, and the effect is performed in addition to the effect pattern based on the first game state. will be executed. In this way, in the production patterns that can be executed under the same conditions and at the same timing, if an element that is not set in a high-priority production pattern is set in a low-priority production pattern, it is limited to that element. An effect of an effect pattern with a low priority may be executed.

If only the signal in the first game state cannot be acquired, the effect pattern (the liquid crystal image effect “BB!” lighting effect) is executed. Further, when only the signal of the second game state cannot be obtained, only the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state (the effect of displaying "character + BB!" on the liquid crystal image) is executed, There is no performance by the lamps on the periphery. When neither the signal of the first game state nor the signal of the second game state can be acquired, naturally the effect on the data display machine is the same as that during normal operation, and no special effect is performed.

In the above example, the signal of the first game state and the signal of the second game state generated under the same conditions and at the same timing were one-to-one, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of effects corresponding to two or more types of flashing patterns may be stored as the second game state signal related to the BB game state. Specifically, there is only one type of signal for the first game state as the BB game state, but in the gaming machine H2, there are two types of the BB game state, a normal BB game state and an advantageous interval BB game state. In some cases, each may be distinguished as a signal of the second game state. That is, when the normal BB game state occurs in the game machine H2, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the first game state is executed in the data display machine H1, and the element not set in the effect pattern is executed. , the effect of the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state of the normal BB game state is executed. Further, when the BB game state occurs during the advantageous section in the game machine H2, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the first game state is executed on the data display machine H1, and the effect pattern set in the effect pattern is executed. In the element not present, the effect of the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state of the BB game state during the advantageous interval is executed.

Specifically, in addition to the above example, the signal of the second game state of the BB game state during the advantageous interval includes the element of displaying the text "BB during the advantageous interval!" It is assumed that a production pattern having an element of lighting the lamps on the outer periphery of the . Then, when the data display machine H1 normally receives both the first game state signal and the second game state signal when the game machine H2 shifts to the BB game state during the advantageous section, first, the first game state signal is received. The effect based on the game state signal is given priority, and the liquid crystal image displays a "character" and the text "BB!". However, an element that does not overlap with the effect pattern based on the first game state and lights the lamp on the outer periphery of the data display machine H1 in "blue" becomes effective, and the effect is performed in addition to the effect pattern based on the first game state. will be executed.

If only the signal in the first game state cannot be acquired, the effect pattern (the effect of the liquid crystal image "BB during the advantageous section!" A production that lights up in blue” is executed. Further, when only the signal of the second game state cannot be obtained, only the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state (the effect of displaying "character + BB!" on the liquid crystal image) is executed, There is no performance by the lamps on the periphery. When neither the signal of the first game state nor the signal of the second game state can be acquired, naturally the effect on the data display machine is the same as that during normal operation, and no special effect is performed.

Also, the signal of the second game state relating to the BB game state during the advantageous interval may exceptionally take precedence over the signal of the first game state. In that case, when both the signal of the first game state and the signal of the second game state relating to the BB game state during the advantageous interval can be normally obtained, the effect based on the signal of the second game state is given priority, and the liquid crystal image is displayed. , the text "BB during advantageous section!" However, the element of displaying a "character" on the liquid crystal screen of the data display machine H1, which does not overlap with the effect pattern based on the second game state related to the BB game state during the advantageous interval, becomes effective, and the effect pattern based on the second game state becomes effective. In addition, the production is executed.

In this way, not only signals relating to the second game state are uniformly given lower priority, but information useful to the player may be given higher priority than signals relating to the first game state. It should be noted that such priority order can be set by the server device H4 that sets the data display device H1 from the outside or by the main body of the data display device H1. In the above example, there are two types of BB game states, but in addition to this, an advantageous premium BB is added, and in the second game state, the three types can be differentiated and the priority can be set. Alternatively, priority may be set by distinguishing more types.

Also, in the effect pattern table of the present embodiment, effects synchronous with other data display machines H1 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as synchronous effects) can be set. The synchronous effect is set with a lower priority than effects based on other game states (the first game state and the second game state). Note that the synchronous effect is a effect executed by a plurality of data display machines H1, and each of a plurality of gaming machines grouped in a predetermined range (for example, parallel arrangement, island arrangement, etc.) by the server or the main body is displayed. This effect is executed by assuming the image display portion H405 of the data display H1 as one common screen. For example, a character image or a text image is moved from the rightmost image display portion H405 toward the leftmost image display portion H405. It is such a production. The order of priority between the synchronous effects and the effects based on other game states can be determined as appropriate. Also, a plurality of synchronous effects may be provided, and priority may be set among them. For example, the order of priority is first game state>synchronization effect 1>second game state>synchronization effect 2 and the like.

Also, FIG. 37 is an example of a game state transition table indicating possible transition destinations of the game state. The game state transition table is stored in the RAM H403 of the data display machine H1 via a server based on the type of gaming machine installed, or by a detachable ROM that stores information to that effect. be done. Note that the mode of storing is not limited to this, and various methods can be applied. As shown in FIG. 37, the vertical axis indicates the original game state, and the horizontal axis indicates the destination game state. When the data display machine H1 detects the transition of the game state, it refers to the game state transition table and confirms whether the performed game state transition is correct.

(motion)
Effect execution processing executed by the control unit H401 of the data display machine H1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the control unit H401 determines whether or not a signal indicating the gaming state is received from the external terminal board H308 of the gaming machine H2 (S20). When the signal indicating the game state is received (S20: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see FIG. 28) and changes the effect to match the game state indicated by the received signal. Accordingly, counting is started (S21).

After the end of step S21, or when the signal indicating the gaming state is not received in step S20 (S20: NO), the control unit H401 turns on the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2 from the image captured by the camera unit H12. It is determined whether or not a mode has been detected (S22). If the lighting mode is detected (S22: YES), the controller H401 determines whether the lighting mode has changed from the previous time (S23). If the lighting mode has changed (S23: YES), the control unit H401 determines whether or not the transition destination of the game state is abnormal (S24). That is, the control unit H401 refers to the game state transition table (see FIG. 37) and determines whether or not the game state corresponding to the effect after the change is abnormal as a transition destination from the current game state. . If the transition destination of the game state is abnormal, the control unit H401 detects it as an error (S25). Here, when an error is detected, the control unit H401 may transmit a signal for notifying the error to the server device H4, or may notify the error using video display or audio output on the data display H1. . After that, the control unit H401 returns the processing to step S20.

If the transition destination is not abnormal (S24: NO), the control unit H401 determines whether or not the performance timing overlaps, including the synchronous performance (S26). If the effect timing overlaps (S26: YES), the control unit H401 selects a preferential effect (S27). The selection method may be a method of comparing effects, or a method of comparing game states related to effects. If it is determined in step S26 that the effect timings do not overlap, or after step S27, the effect is changed according to the lighting mode (S28), and the process returns to step S20. On the other hand, if the lighting mode has not changed in step S23 (S23: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current effect (S29) and returns the process to step S20.

If the lighting mode is not detected in step S22 (S22: NO), the controller H401 determines whether or not a specific lighting mode is being detected (S30). If the specific lighting mode is not being detected (S30: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S20. If the specific lighting mode is being detected (S30: YES), the controller H401 detects an error state (S31). Then, the control unit H401 determines whether or not the count value that started counting in step S21 satisfies the termination condition (S32). When the count value satisfies the termination condition (S32: YES), the control unit H401 stops the effect being executed (S33), and returns the process to step S20. On the other hand, when the count value does not satisfy the end condition (S32: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S20.

(Modification 1)
A modification according to the seventh embodiment will be described. For example, if the data display H1 cannot read the lighting state of the top lamp H60 a plurality of times (or for a predetermined period of time or more), the video display, audio output, and illumination of the data display H1 are turned off for demonstration purposes. You may change to a production pattern.

Also, the light emitting means of the gaming machine H2 is not limited to visible light, and may be infrared light, for example. As a result, for example, the data display H1 can detect the lighting mode of the light-emitting means with the infrared sensor of the sensor group H404, and can directly specify the effect pattern.

The setting of the priority order is not limited to the effect, and for example, the priority order can be set for the data screen display (see FIG. 5) displayed by the player operating the data display machine H1. good too. For example, it is preferable to give priority to data screen display over other effect displays.

Also, depending on the blinking timing of the top lamp H60 and the image acquisition timing of the camera unit H12, the image of the top lamp H60 when lit may not be included in the image, and the data display machine H1 may not receive the second game state accurately. Therefore, you can avoid this by the following method. That is, when the game machine H2 controls the flashing of the top lamp H60, after flashing for a predetermined period, the flashing timing may be delayed for a period (for example, a shorter period of time than the flashing interval) to resume flashing. good. For example, after repeating a one-second blinking pattern four times, the same pattern may be repeated after waiting several milliseconds. Similarly, the data display device H1 may wait for imaging at predetermined time intervals so that the image acquisition timing of the camera is shifted. Also, the timing of imaging by the camera unit H12 on the data display H1 may be determined based on the signal from the external terminal board H308.

In the above-described embodiment, the data display machine is used as an example. However, if the game machine is equipped with a camera unit or the like that is individually installed in the game machine and is capable of executing an effect, it can be installed on the upper part of the game machine. The present invention is not limited to the data display machine described above, but can be applied to various game devices such as a rental device installed side by side with a game machine, an inter-machine data display machine installed between machines, and the like.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, a gaming device and gaming system according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(composition)
FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game display device 1 as a game device and the game system according to this embodiment. The gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 , a gaming medium lending device 3 , and a server device (external storage device) 4 .

The game display device 1 includes a control unit 1p, and is communicably connected to each of the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4 via the control unit 1p. The control unit 1p is connected to the screen unit 11A, the projector main body 12, the operation unit 14, and the like (see FIG. 3), and controls the screen unit 11A and the projector main body 12. FIG. For example, when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 1p controls the display on the screen unit 11A according to the operation.

The control unit 1p, as shown in FIG. 39, has a main CPU (first control means) 1p1, a sub CPU (second control means) 1p2, and a RAM (storage means) 1p3. The main CPU 1p1 and the sub CPU 1p2 operate independently of each other.

The main CPU 1p1 is connected to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 so as to be capable of two-way communication.

The sub CPU 1p2 is communicably connected to each of the gaming machine 2 and the main CPU 1p1. Between the sub CPU 1p2 and the gaming machine 2, one-way communication from the gaming machine 2 to the sub CPU 1p2 is possible. On the other hand, two-way communication is possible between the sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1. The sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1 are connected via a dedicated signal line for confirming communication as described later.

The RAM 1p3 is connected to the sub CPU 1p2 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The RAM 1p3 temporarily stores information received from the game machine 2 by the sub CPU 1p2. The information that the sub CPU 1p2 receives from the gaming machine 2 includes the aforementioned game information (the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired game media or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history), and the like. Also, the sub CPU 1p2 reads information stored in the RAM 1p3 and transmits the information to the main CPU 1p3.

(motion)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 1p2 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the sub CPU 1p2 determines whether communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible (S80: determination processing). The determination process of S80 is executed at regular polling intervals via the dedicated signal line connecting the sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1. The determination process can be performed immediately by communication via the signal line.

If it is determined that communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible (S80: YES), the sub CPU 1p2 stores the information (game information, etc.) received from the gaming machine 2 in the RAM 1p3 (S81: storage processing), The information received from the machine 2 (the information stored in the RAM 1p3 in S81) is transmitted to the main CPU 1p1 (S82: transmission processing). After S82, the sub CPU 1p2 ends the routine.

When it is determined that communication with the main CPU 1p1 is impossible (S80: NO), the sub CPU 1p2 stores the information received from the gaming machine 2 in the RAM 1p3 without transmitting it to the main CPU 1p1 (S83: temporary storage processing). . After S83, the sub CPU 1p2 again determines whether or not communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible in the same manner as in S80 (S84: determination processing). If it is determined that communication with the main CPU 1p1 is impossible (S84: NO), the sub CPU 1p2 returns the process to S83. If it is determined that communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible (S84: YES), the sub CPU 1p2 stores the information (game information, etc.) received from the gaming machine 2 in the RAM 1p3 (S85: storage processing), The information received from the machine 2 (the information stored in the RAM 1p3 in S85) and the information stored in the RAM 1p3 in S83 (temporary storage processing) are transmitted to the main CPU 1p1 (S86: return transmission processing). After S86, the sub CPU 1p2 ends the routine.

The main CPU 1p1 transmits the information transmitted in S82 and S86 to the server device 4. FIG. The server device 4 stores information transmitted from the game display device 1 provided for each gaming machine 2 .

If the state in which the main CPU 1p1 cannot communicate continues for a predetermined period of time or longer (that is, if the determination of S84: YES is not made even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the determination of S80: NO), the RAM 1p3 The stored information may be extracted via debug serial.

(State transition of main CPU and sub CPU)
State transitions of the main CPU 1p1 and the sub CPU 1p2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. FIG. 41 is a state transition diagram of the main CPU 1p1. FIG. 42 is a state transition diagram of the sub CPU 1p2.

The vertical axis "RDY1" in FIG. 41 is a ready signal indicating that the main CPU 1p1 is ready. When the main CPU 1p1 has not been activated and is not operating, the ready signal RDY1 is "0 (LOW level)." When the main CPU 1p1 has been activated and is operating, the ready signal RDY1 is "1 (HIGH level)." ”. The ready signal RDY1 is transmitted to the sub CPU 1p2.

The horizontal axis "REQ" in FIG. 41 is a request signal indicating that the main CPU 1p1 requests communication from the sub CPU 1p2. When the main CPU 1p1 does not request communication from the sub CPU 1p2, the request signal REQ is "0 (LOW level)". When the main CPU 1p1 requests communication from the sub CPU 1p2, the request signal REQ is "1 (HIGH level)". The request signal REQ is transmitted to the sub CPU 1p2.

The determination processing of S80 and S84 in FIG. 40 is performed based on the ready signal RDY1 and the request signal REQ.

The vertical axis "RDY2" in FIG. 42 is a ready signal indicating that the sub CPU 1p2 is ready. When the sub CPU 1p2 has not been activated and is not operating, the ready signal RDY2 is "0 (LOW level)". When the sub CPU 1p2 has been activated and is in operation, the ready signal RDY2 is "1 (HIGH level)". The ready signal RDY2 is transmitted to the main CPU 1p1.

The horizontal axis "ACK" in FIG. 42 is an acknowledge signal indicating that the sub CPU 1p2 can respond to the communication request. When the sub CPU 1p2 cannot respond to the communication request, the acknowledge signal ACK is "0 (LOW level)". When the sub CPU 1p2 can respond to the communication request, the acknowledge signal ACK is "1 (HIGH level)". The acknowledge signal ACK is transmitted to the main CPU 1p1.

"A1" in FIG. 41 indicates a state in which the main CPU 1p1 is starting up (starting up but not yet completed). For example, immediately after the game display device 1 is powered on, it is in the state of "A1". At this time, the ready signal RDY1 and the request signal REQ are both "0 (LOW level)". "a1" indicates an event in which the main CPU 1p1 has completed booting. When the "a1" event occurs in the "A1" state, the ready signal RDY1 switches from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)", and the state transitions from "A1" to "B1".

"B1" in FIG. 41 indicates a state in which the main CPU 1p1 monitors the state of the status signal from the sub CPU 1p2 (specifically, when the ready signal RDY2 changes from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)"). ”). "b1" indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY2 is "0 (LOW level)". If a "b1" event occurs in the "B1" state, the "B1" state is maintained. "c1" indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY2 is "0 (LOW level)" for a predetermined time or longer. When the event "c1" occurs in the state "B1", the state transitions from "B1" to "E1". "E1" will be described later.

"d1" in FIG. 41 indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY2 is switched from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)". When the event "d1" occurs in the state "B1", the request signal REQ switches from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)" and changes state from "B1" to "C1".

"C1" in FIG. 41 indicates a state in which the main CPU 1p1 monitors the state of the status signal from the sub CPU 1p2 (specifically, when the acknowledge signal ACK changes from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)"). ”). "e1" indicates an event in which the acknowledge signal ACK is "0 (LOW level)". If an "e1" event occurs in the "C1" state, the "C1" state is maintained. "f1" indicates an event in which the acknowledge signal ACK is "0 (LOW level)" for a predetermined time or longer. When the event "f1" occurs in the state "C1", the request signal REQ switches from "1 (HIGH level)" to "0 (LOW level)", and the state transitions from "C1" to "E1". "E1" will be described later.

"g1" in FIG. 41 indicates an event in which the acknowledge signal ACK is switched from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)". When an event "g1" occurs in the state "C1", the state transitions from "C1" to "D1".

"D1" in FIG. 41 indicates a state in which the main CPU 1p1 is performing UART (start-stop synchronization) communication with the sub CPU 1p2. "h1" indicates an event in which both the ready signal RDY2 and the acknowledge signal ACK are "1 (HIGH level)". If an "h1" event occurs in the "D1" state, the "D1" state is maintained. "i1" indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY2 or the acknowledge signal ACK is "0 (LOW level)". When an "i1" event occurs in the "D1" state, the request signal REQ switches from "1 (HIGH level)" to "0 (LOW level)", and the state transitions from "D1" to "E1".

"E1" in FIG. 41 indicates a state in which the main CPU 1p1 is performing error processing because the status of the sub CPU 1p2 is abnormal. The error processing includes, for example, reset processing for the sub CPU 1p2, error notification to the server device 4, and the like. By notifying the server device 4 of the error, it is possible to urge the manager of the game arcade or the like to restore the sub CPU 1p2 or extract information stored in the RAM 1p3.

"j1" in FIG. 41 indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY2 is "0 (LOW level)" and the acknowledge signal ACK is "1 (HIGH level)". If a "j1" event occurs in the "E1" state, the "E1" state is maintained. "k1" indicates an event in which the main CPU 1p1 has completed error processing. When an event "k1" occurs in the state "E1", the state transitions from "E1" to "B1".

"A2" in FIG. 42 indicates a state in which the sub CPU 1p2 is starting up (starting up but not yet completed). For example, immediately after the game display device 1 is powered on, it is in the state of "A2". At this time, the ready signal RDY2 and the acknowledge signal ACK are both "0 (LOW level)". "a2" indicates an event that the sub CPU 1p2 has completed booting. When the event "a2" occurs in the state "A2", the ready signal RDY2 switches from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)", and the state transitions from "A2" to "B2".

"B2" in FIG. 42 indicates a state in which the sub CPU 1p2 monitors the state of the status signal from the main CPU 1p1 (specifically, when the ready signal RDY1 changes from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)"). ”). "b2" indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY1 is "0 (LOW level)". If a "b2" event occurs in the "B2" state, the "B2" state is maintained.

"d2" in FIG. 42 indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY1 is switched from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)". When an event "d2" occurs in the state "B2", the state transitions from "B2" to "C2".

"C2" in FIG. 42 indicates a state in which the sub CPU 1p2 monitors the state of the status signal from the main CPU 1p1 (specifically, the request signal REQ changes from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)"). ”). "e2" indicates an event in which the request signal REQ is "0 (LOW level)". If an "e2" event occurs in the "C2" state, the "C2" state is maintained.

"f2" in FIG. 42 indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY1 is "0 (LOW level)". When an event "f2" occurs in the state "C2", the state transitions from "C2" to "B2".

"g2" in FIG. 42 indicates an event in which the request signal REQ is switched from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)". When the event "g2" occurs in the state "C2", the acknowledge signal ACK switches from "0 (LOW level)" to "1 (HIGH level)", and the state transitions from "C2" to "D2".

"D2" in FIG. 42 indicates a state in which the sub CPU 1p2 is performing UART communication with the main CPU 1p1. "h2" indicates an event in which both the ready signal RDY1 and the request signal REQ are "1 (HIGH level)". If an event "h2" occurs in the state "D2", the state "D2" is maintained. "i2" indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY1 or the request signal REQ is "0 (LOW level)". When the event "i2" occurs in the state "D2", the acknowledge signal ACK switches from "1 (HIGH level)" to "0 (LOW level)", and the state transitions from "D2" to "E2".

"E2" in FIG. 42 indicates a state in which the sub CPU 1p2 is performing error processing because the status of the main CPU 1p1 is abnormal. The error processing includes the temporary storage processing of S83 in FIG. 40, and the like.

"j2" in FIG. 42 indicates an event in which the ready signal RDY1 is "(LOW level)" and the request signal REQ is "1 (HIGH level)". If a "j2" event occurs in the "E2" state, the "E2" state is maintained. "k2" indicates an event in which the sub CPU 1p2 has completed error processing. When an event "k2" occurs in the state "E2", the state transitions from "E2" to "B2".

As described above, the sub CPU 1p2 changes the state depending on the communication status with the main CPU 1p1, and when an error state occurs, the information received from the gaming machine 2 (game information, etc.) is stored in the RAM 1p3, and the error state is When it is canceled, the information temporarily stored in the RAM 1p3 is transmitted to the main CPU 1p1.

(Overview of the eighth embodiment)
The gaming display device 1 of the eighth embodiment has a main CPU 1p1, a sub CPU 1p2 communicably connected to each of the gaming machine 2 and the main CPU 1p1, and a RAM 1p3 communicably connected to the sub CPU 1p2. The sub CPU 1p2 executes determination processing (S80) for determining whether or not communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible. A storage process (S81) for storing information received from the gaming machine 2 in the RAM 1p3, and a transmission process (S82) for transmitting information received from the gaming machine 2 to the main CPU 1p1. If it is determined that it is possible (S80: NO), the information received from the gaming machine 2 is stored in the RAM 1p3 without being transmitted to the main CPU 1p1 (S83).

The gaming system of the eighth embodiment has a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 and a server device 4 . The gaming display device 1 includes a main CPU 1p1, a sub CPU 1p2 communicably connected to each of the gaming machine 2 and the main CPU 1p1, and a RAM 1p3 communicably connected to the sub CPU 1p2. The sub CPU 1p2 executes determination processing (S80) for determining whether or not communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible. A storage process (S81) for storing the information received from the game machine 2 in the RAM 1p3 and a transmission process (S82) for transmitting the information received from the gaming machine 2 to the main CPU 1p1 are executed, and in the determination process communication with the main CPU 1p1 is disabled. If it is determined that it is possible (S80: NO), the information received from the gaming machine 2 is stored in the RAM 1p3 without being transmitted to the main CPU 1p1 (S83). The main CPU 1p1 is communicably connected to the server device 4 and transmits to the server device 4 the information transmitted in the transmission process (S82).

According to the above configuration, when the main CPU 1p1 of the gaming display device 1 cannot communicate, the sub CPU 1p2 of the gaming display device 1 stores the information received from the gaming machine 2 in the RAM 1p3. Therefore, even if the control means of the game display device 1 becomes unable to communicate, it is possible to avoid a situation where the history data of the game machine 2 cannot be obtained.

Furthermore, in the game display device 1 of the eighth embodiment, the sub CPU 1p2 is determined to be unable to communicate with the main CPU 1p1 in the determination process (S80: NO), and after the temporary storage process is executed (S83), If it is determined in the determination process that communication with the main CPU 1p1 is possible (S84: YES), the information received from the gaming machine 2 and the information stored in the RAM 1p3 in the storage process (S85) and the temporary storage process (S83). to the main CPU 1p1 (S86).

According to the above configuration, when the main CPU 1p1 of the game display device 1 returns from the disabled state to the communicable state, the information temporarily stored in the RAM 1p3 until now is transmitted to the main CPU 1p1. The main CPU 1p1 receives all of the information output by . As a result, it is possible to obtain the history data of the gaming machine 2 with certainty.

In this embodiment, the game display device is exemplified as a game device according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game device according to the present invention may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a server device, or a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine. Also, the game display device as the game device according to the present invention is not limited to a game display device functioning as a transmissive projector device, and may be one having a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). .

Further, in the present embodiment, the storage process (S81) is executed before the transmission process (S82), but the temporal order of the storage process (S81) and the transmission process (S82) is not particularly limited. (S81) may be performed after the transmission process (S82) or simultaneously with the transmission process (S82).

Similarly, in the present embodiment, the storage process (S85) is executed before the return transmission process (S86), but the temporal order of the storage process (S85) and the return transmission process (S86) is not particularly limited. , the storage process (S85) may be executed after the return transmission process (S86) or simultaneously with the return transmission process (S86).

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming device and gaming system according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(composition)
FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game display device 1 as a game device and the game system according to this embodiment. The gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 , a gaming media lending device (external device) 3 , and a server device (external device) 4 .

In FIG. 43, thick lines are power supply lines and thin lines are signal lines.

The game display device 1 includes a first power supply 1x, a second power supply 1y independent of the first power supply 1x, a first photocoupler 1c1, a second photocoupler 1c2, a selector 1s, a first buffer 1b1, It has a second buffer 1b2 and a control unit 1p. The first photocoupler 1c1, the second photocoupler 1c2, and the selector 1s are driven by being supplied with power from the first power supply 1x. The control unit (control means) 1p is driven by power supply from the second power supply 1y. The first buffer 1b1 and the second buffer 1b2 are devices that separate the signal line on the first power supply 1x side and the signal line on the second power supply 1y side from each other. The game display device 1 is communicably connected to the gaming machine 2, the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 via the first photocoupler 1c1, the selector 1s and the second photocoupler 1c2.

The game display device 1 is provided with an AC adapter and a power switch (both not shown). When the AC adapter is connected to a commercial power supply through an outlet, power is supplied to the first power supply 1x and the first power supply 1x is turned on. When the power switch is switched from OFF to ON in this state, power is also supplied to the second power supply 1y, and the second power supply 1y is turned ON. That is, the first power supply 1x is energized and turned on by connecting the AC adapter to the commercial power supply, whereas the second power supply 1y is not energized only by connecting the AC adapter to the commercial power supply. When the switch is turned on, the power is turned on.

The control unit 1p is composed of a CPU and the like. The control unit 1p is connected to the screen unit 11A, the projector main body 12, the operation unit 14, and the like (see FIG. 3), and controls the screen unit 11A and the projector main body 12. FIG. For example, when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 1p controls the display on the screen unit 11A according to the operation.

The first photocoupler 1c1 and the second photocoupler 1c2 (transmitting means) transmit the information received from the game machine 2 to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4. FIG. Each of the first photocoupler 1c1 and the second photocoupler 1c2 is a contact input/output element, and internally converts an electrical signal into light and converts it back into an electrical signal, thereby transmitting a signal while electrically isolating it. .

Although only one photocoupler 1c1 and one second photocoupler 1c2 are shown in FIG. 43, there are 12 photocouplers corresponding to the number of signal lines shown in FIG. 30, for example. The above-mentioned "medal insertion signal", "medal payout signal", "external signal 2", "external signal 1", "external signal 3", "security signal", etc. are sent from the gaming machine 2 to the first photocoupler 1c1. is entered.

The first photocoupler 1c1 outputs the input signal input from the gaming machine 2 as the first signal to the selector 1s and further outputs it to the control unit 1p via the first buffer 1b1.

The control unit 1p receives the first signal from the first photocoupler 1c1 and outputs the selection signal and the second signal to the selector 1s.

The selector 1s selects one of the first signal and the second signal based on the selection signal and outputs the selected signal to the second photocoupler 1c2. The selector 1s selects the second signal when the selection signal is at HIGH level, and selects the first signal when the selection signal is at LOW level.

The second photocoupler 1c2 outputs the signal received from the selector 1s to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 as an output signal. The output signals are, for example, "IN information", "OUT information", "BB information", "RB information", "ART information", "error information", "abnormality 1 information", and "abnormality 2 information" shown in FIG. , “abnormality 3 information”, “abnormality 4 information”, and the like.

(motion)
With reference to FIG. 44, the through processing and change processing executed in the game display device 1 will be described.

When both the first power source 1x and the second power source 1y are ON, the game display device 1 selectively executes the “through processing” and the “change processing” under the control of the control unit 1p. is ON and the second power supply 1y is OFF, "through processing" is executed. The “through processing” is the information received by the first photocoupler 1c1 from the game machine 2 without being changed (specifically, without changing the HIGH/LOW of the input signal), and the information is directly transferred to the game medium. This is a process of transmitting to the rental device 3 and the server device 4 . The “change process” changes the information received by the first photocoupler 1c1 from the game machine 2 (specifically, by switching the HIGH/LOW of the input signal) to change the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 It is a process that can be sent to

In the "through processing" when both the first power supply 1x and the second power supply 1y are ON, as shown in FIG. is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43, the first photocoupler 1c1 outputs the input signal (HIGH level) input from the gaming machine 2 as the first signal to the selector 1s, and further through the first buffer 1b1. Output to the control unit 1p. The control unit 1p outputs a selection signal (HIGH level) and a second signal (HIGH level) to the selector 1s. The selector 1s selects a second signal (HIGH level) based on the selection signal (HIGH level) and outputs the selected second signal (HIGH level) to the second photocoupler 1c2. The second photocoupler 1c2 outputs the second signal (HIGH level) received from the selector 1s to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 as an output signal.

In this way, in the "through processing", the information input to the game display device 1 by the game machine 2 is not changed (while the HIGH level is maintained), and the information is sent to the game medium lending device 3 as it is. and transmitted to the server device 4 .

In the "change processing" when both the first power source 1x and the second power source 1y are ON, as shown in FIG. 44, the input signal, the first signal and the selection signal are all "HIGH level", 2 signal and the output signal are "LOW level". In this case, as shown in FIG. 43, the first photocoupler 1c1 outputs the input signal (HIGH level) input from the gaming machine 2 as the first signal to the selector 1s, and further through the first buffer 1b1. Output to the control unit 1p. The control unit 1p outputs the selection signal (HIGH level) and the second signal (LOW level) changed from the first signal to the selector 1s. The selector 1s selects the second signal (LOW level) based on the selection signal (HIGH level) instead of the first signal input from the first photocoupler 1c1, and converts the selected second signal (LOW level) to the 2 output to the photocoupler 1c2. The second photocoupler 1c2 outputs the second signal (LOW level) received from the selector 1s to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 as an output signal.

In this way, in the "change processing", the information input by the game machine 2 to the game display device 1 is changed (while the HIGH level is switched to the LOW level), and the game medium lending device 3 and the server are changed. It is sent to device 4 .

In the "through processing" when the first power supply 1x is ON and the second power supply 1y is OFF, as shown in FIG. The signal and selection signal are at "LOW level" because the second power supply 1y is OFF and the control unit 1p is not driven. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43, the first photocoupler 1c1 outputs the input signal (HIGH level) input from the gaming machine 2 to the selector 1s as the first signal. The selector 1s selects the first signal (HIGH level) based on the selection signal (LOW level) and outputs the selected first signal (HIGH level) to the second photocoupler 1c2. The second photocoupler 1c2 outputs the first signal (HIGH level) received from the selector 1s to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 as an output signal.

For example, when a "security signal" (see FIG. 30) is input from the game machine 2 to the game display device 1 and the "through processing" is executed, the game media lending device is activated while the "security signal" remains at a HIGH level. 3 and the server device 4 . That is, information indicating the error (for example, a door open error indicating that the front door of the gaming machine 2 is open) is transmitted to the outside.

On the other hand, for example, when a "security signal" (see FIG. 30) is input from the game machine 2 to the game display device 1, and the "change process" is executed, the "security signal" is changed from HIGH level to LOW level. It is output to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 in a state where the game medium has been set. That is, information indicating the error (for example, a door open error indicating that the front door of the gaming machine 2 is open) is not transmitted to the outside.

(Overview of the ninth embodiment)
The game display device 1 of the ninth embodiment is a game display device 1 communicably connected to each of the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4, and includes a first power supply 1x and a second power supply 1x. A second power supply 1y independent from the first power supply 1x and a first photocoupler driven by receiving power supply from the first power supply 1x to transmit information received from the game machine 2 to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4. It has 1c1, a second photocoupler 1c2, and a control unit 1p driven by receiving power supply from a second power supply 1y. When both the first power source 1x and the second power source 1y are ON, the game display device 1 displays the information received from the gaming machine 2 by the first photocoupler 1c1 without changing the information. and a "change process" in which the information received by the first photocoupler 1c1 from the game machine 2 can be changed and transmitted to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4. , and when the first power supply 1x is ON and the second power supply 1y is OFF, "through processing" is executed.

The gaming system of the ninth embodiment has a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 , a gaming media lending device 3 , and a server device 4 . The game display device 1 is driven by a first power supply 1x, a second power supply 1y independent of the first power supply 1x, and power supply from the first power supply 1x, and receives information received from the game machine 2 as a game medium. It has a first photocoupler 1c1 and a second photocoupler 1c2 that transmit data to the rental device 3 and the server device 4, and a control unit 1p that receives and drives power supplied from the second power source 1y. When both the first power source 1x and the second power source 1y are ON, the game display device 1 displays the information received from the gaming machine 2 by the first photocoupler 1c1 without changing the information. and a "change process" in which the information received by the first photocoupler 1c1 from the game machine 2 can be changed and transmitted to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4. , and when the first power supply 1x is ON and the second power supply 1y is OFF, "through processing" is executed.

According to the above configuration, even when information is transmitted from the game machine 2 to the game display device 1 while the second power source 1y of the game display device 1 is OFF, the first power source 1x of the game display device 1 is turned off. If it is ON, "through processing" is executed, and the information received by the first photocoupler 1c1 from the game machine 2 is transmitted to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 without being changed. Therefore, even when information is transmitted from the game machine 2 to the game display device 1 while the game display device 1 is powered off, the information can be transmitted to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 . be.

In this embodiment, the game display device is exemplified as a game device according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game device according to the present invention may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a server device, or a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine. Also, the game display device as the game device according to the present invention is not limited to a game display device functioning as a transmissive projector device, and may be one having a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). .

In this embodiment, there are 12 photocouplers 1c1 and 1c2 corresponding to the number of signal lines shown in FIG. 30, and all 12 photocouplers receive power from the first power supply 1x. , but not limited to. For example, at least one of the 12 photocouplers (a photocoupler to which a "security signal" is input) receives power from the first power supply 1x, and the other photocouplers receive power from the second power supply 1y. You may receive it.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming device and gaming system according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(composition)
FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game display device 1 as a game device and the game system according to this embodiment. The gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 , a gaming media lending device 3 , and a server device 4 .

The game display device 1 includes a control unit 1p, and is communicably connected to each of the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4 via the control unit 1p. The control unit 1p is connected to the screen unit 11A, the projector main body 12, the operation unit 14, and the like (see FIG. 3), and controls the screen unit 11A and the projector main body 12. FIG. For example, when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 1p controls the display on the screen unit 11A according to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 45, the control unit 1p has a main board (first board) 1m1, a sub-board (second board) 1m2, and a harness 1h interposed between these boards 1m1 and 1m2.

In FIG. 45, thick lines are power supply lines and thin lines are signal lines.

A main power supply (first power supply) 1x1, a main CPU (first control means) 1p1, and a selector 1s are mounted on the main board 1m1. The main CPU 1p1 and the selector 1s operate by being supplied with power from the main power supply 1x1. The main CPU 1p1 is connected to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 so as to be capable of two-way communication.

A sub power supply (second power supply) 1x2 and a sub CPU (second control means) 1p2 are mounted on the sub board 1m2. The sub power supply 1x2 receives power supply from the main power supply 1x1 via the selector 1s. The sub CPU 1p2 operates by being supplied with power from the sub power supply 1x2.

The sub CPU 1p2 is communicably connected to each of the gaming machine 2 and the main CPU 1p1. Between the sub CPU 1p2 and the gaming machine 2, one-way communication from the gaming machine 2 to the sub CPU 1p2 is possible. On the other hand, two-way communication is possible between the sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1. The main CPU 1p1 and the sub CPU 1p2 operate independently of each other.

(motion)
Processing executed by the main CPU 1p1 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the main CPU 1p1 determines whether or not the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are connected to each other via the harness 1h (S100: first determination process). The determination processing of S100 is executed via an arbitrary board connection determination circuit (not shown) connected to the main CPU 1p1. As the substrate connection determination circuit, a known circuit can be applied. For example, the circuit board connection determination circuit includes a power supply, a resistor, and a switching element. 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are not properly connected, a HIGH signal from the power supply is input to the main CPU 1p1.

When it is determined that the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are not connected to each other via the harness 1h (S100: NO), the main CPU 1p1 repeats the process.

When it is determined that the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are connected to each other via the harness 1h (S100: YES), the main CPU 1p1 transmits a power supply signal to the selector 1s (S101: power supply start process). ). The power supply signal is a signal indicating that power is to be supplied from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2. When the selector 1s receives the power supply signal, power supply from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2 is started.

After S101, the main CPU 1p1 transmits a reset release signal for releasing the reset to the sub CPU 1p2 (S102). When the sub CPU 1p2 receives the reset release signal, it becomes activatable. After S102, the main CPU 1p1 determines whether or not the sub CPU 1p2 has output a ready signal indicating that the sub CPU 1p2 is ready (that is, whether or not the sub CPU 1p2 is operating) (S103: second determination processing). . The determination process of S103 is executed via a signal line connecting the sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1 via the harness 1h. The determination process can be performed immediately by communication via the signal line.

If the ready signal is not output from the sub CPU 1p2 (S103: NO), it is presumed that the main board 1m1 and the sub board 1m2 are not properly connected. In this case, the main CPU 1p1 transmits a reset signal for resetting to the sub CPU 1p2 (S104). When the sub CPU 1p2 receives the reset signal, it enters a reset state. After S104, the main CPU 1p1 transmits a power supply stop signal to the selector 1s (S105: power supply stop processing). The power supply stop signal is a signal indicating to stop the power supply from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2. When the selector 1s receives the power supply stop signal, power supply from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2 is stopped. After S105, the main CPU 1p1 returns the process to S100. That is, the main CPU 1p1 further executes S100 (first determination process) after S105 (power supply stop process).

When it is determined that the ready signal has been output from the sub CPU 1p2 (S103: YES), the main CPU 1p1 terminates this routine.

(Overview of the tenth embodiment)
The game display device 1 of the tenth embodiment is a game display device 1 that is communicably connected to the game machine 2, and includes a main power supply 1x1 and a main power supply that operates by receiving power supply from the main power supply 1x1. A main board 1m1 on which a CPU 1p1 is mounted, a sub-power supply 1x2 that receives power from the main power supply 1x1, and a sub-CPU 1p2 that is communicably connected to the main CPU 1p1 and operates by receiving power from the sub-power supply 1x2 is mounted. and a sub-board 1m2. The main CPU 1p1 performs a first determination process (S100) for determining whether or not the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are connected to each other, and determines whether the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are connected to each other in the first determination process. (S100: YES), power supply start processing (S101) for starting power supply from the main power source 1x1 to the secondary power source 1x2 and power supply start processing (S101). After that, second determination processing (S103) for determining whether or not the sub CPU 1p2 is operating, and if it is determined in the second determination processing that the sub CPU 1p2 does not operate (S103: NO), the power supply is switched from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2. power supply stop processing (S105) for stopping the power supply of the .

The gaming system of the tenth embodiment has a gaming machine 2 and a gaming display device 1 communicably connected to the gaming machine 2 . The game display device 1 includes a main power supply 1x1, a main board 1m1 on which a main CPU 1p1 that operates by receiving power supply from the main power supply 1x1 is mounted, a sub power supply 1x2 that receives power supply from the main power supply 1x1, and , and a sub board 1m2 mounted with a sub CPU 1p2 that is communicably connected to the main CPU 1p1 and operates by receiving power supplied from the sub power supply 1x2. The main CPU 1p1 performs a first determination process (S100) for determining whether or not the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are connected to each other, and determines whether the main board 1m1 and the sub-board 1m2 are connected to each other in the first determination process. (S100: YES), power supply start processing (S101) for starting power supply from the main power source 1x1 to the sub power source 1x2 and power supply start processing (S101). After that, second determination processing (S103) for determining whether or not the sub CPU 1p2 is operating, and if it is determined in the second determination processing that the sub CPU 1p2 does not operate (S103: NO), the main power supply 1x1 is switched to the sub power supply 1x2. power supply stop processing (S105) for stopping the power supply of the .

According to the above configuration, the main CPU 1p1 determines whether or not the sub CPU 1p2 is operating after the power supply from the main power source 1x1 to the sub power source 1x2 is started. Power supply from the power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2 is stopped. As a result, even if connection failure occurs between the substrates 1m1 and 1m2, it is possible to prevent short-circuiting and breakage of components.

Furthermore, in the game display device 1 of the tenth embodiment, the main CPU 1p1 further executes the first determination process (S100) after the power supply stop process (S105).

According to the above configuration, after the power supply from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2 is temporarily stopped because the operation of the sub CPU 1p2 is not confirmed, it is determined again whether there is connection between the boards 1m1 and 1m2. When the connection between the boards 1m1 and 1m2 is confirmed, power supply from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub power supply 1x2 is started, and when the operation of the sub CPU 1p2 is confirmed, the power supply is continued. As a result, even after the supply of power from the main power supply 1x1 to the sub-power supply 1x2 is temporarily stopped, if an appropriate connection between the boards 1m1 and 1m2 is realized, power is supplied again, and the sub-CPU 1p2 is restored by the sub-power supply 1x2. can be operated.

In this embodiment, the game display device is exemplified as a game device according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game device according to the present invention may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a server device, or a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine. Also, the game display device as the game device according to the present invention is not limited to a game display device functioning as a transmissive projector device, and may be one having a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). .

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a gaming device and gaming system according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(overall structure)
FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game display device 1 as a game device and the game system according to this embodiment. The gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 , a gaming media lending device 3 , and a server device 4 .

The game display device 1 includes a control unit 1p, and is communicably connected to each of the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4 via the control unit 1p. The control unit 1p is connected to the screen unit 11A, the projector main body 12, the operation unit 14, and the like (see FIG. 3), and controls the screen unit 11A and the projector main body 12. FIG. For example, when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 1p controls the display on the screen unit 11A according to the operation.

The control unit 1p, as shown in FIG. 47, has a main CPU 1p1, a sub CPU (control means) 1p2, and a storage unit 1r. The main CPU 1p1 and the sub CPU 1p2 operate independently of each other.

The main CPU 1p1 is connected to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 so as to be capable of two-way communication.

The sub CPU 1p2 is communicably connected to each of the gaming machine 2 and the main CPU 1p1. Between the sub CPU 1p2 and the gaming machine 2, one-way communication from the gaming machine 2 to the sub CPU 1p2 is possible. On the other hand, two-way communication is possible between the sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1.

The storage unit 1r is connected to the sub CPU 1p2 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The storage unit 1r temporarily stores information received from the gaming machine 2 by the sub CPU 1p2. The information that the sub CPU 1p2 receives from the gaming machine 2 includes the aforementioned game information (the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired game media or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history), and the like. Also, the sub CPU 1p2 reads out the information stored in the storage unit 1r and transmits it to the main CPU 1p3.

(Structure of storage unit)
Referring to FIG. 48, the configuration of storage unit 1r will be described in detail.

The storage unit 1r includes an MMU (Memory Management Unit) 1d, a GPIO (General-purpose input/output) 1e, an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) 1f, a first memory 1r1 (first storage means), a second and a memory (second storage means). The first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2 are composed of FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), for example. The sub CPU 1p2 is connected to each of the MMU 1d and GPIO 1e so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The ASIC 1f has a selector 1s, a BUSY circuit 1g, and a DELAY circuit 1i.

(motion)
Referring to FIG. 49, processing executed by the sub CPU 1p2 (control regarding writing and reading to the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2) will be described.

When receiving the information from the gaming machine 2, the sub CPU 1p2 first determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a power failure has occurred during the most recent writing to the memories 1r1 and 1r2) (S110). .

When it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (S110: NO), the sub CPU 1p2 executes the writing process (S111). In the writing process (S111), the information received from the gaming machine 2 is written so that the information written in the second memory 1r2 at the same point in time is prior to the information written in the first memory 1r1. This is a process of writing to the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2 with different timings. In the write process (S111), the sub CPU 1p2 controls the MMU 1d and the ASIC 1f. Under the control of the sub CPU 1p2, the write signal xW is input from the MMU 1d to the selector 1s of the ASIC 1f, and the information is written to the first memory 1r1. 2 Information is written to the memory 1r2. In this embodiment, the writing of information to the second memory 1r2 is started at the same time as the writing of information to the first memory 1r1 is completed. After S111, the sub CPU 1p2 ends the routine.

When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied (S110: YES), the sub CPU 1p2 reads the information written in the first memory 1r1 via the MMU 1d and ASIC 1f (S112: first read processing). The information read in S112 includes the data of the information received from the gaming machine 2 and the checksum of the data.

After S112, the sub CPU 1p2 determines whether the information read in S112 is normal (S113: first determination process). The determination process of S113 is executed by comparing the data included in the information read out in S112 with the checksum.

If it is determined that the information is normal (S113: YES), the sub CPU 1p2 advances the process to S111.

If it is determined that the information is not normal (S113: NO), the sub CPU 1p2 reads the information written in the second memory 1r2 via the MMU 1d, GPIO 1e and ASIC 1f (S114: second reading process). The information read in S114 includes the data of the information received from the gaming machine 2 and the checksum of the data.

After S114, the sub CPU 1p2 determines whether the information read in S114 is normal (S115: second determination process). The determination process of S115 is executed by comparing the data included in the information read out in S114 with the checksum.

If it is determined that the information is normal (S115: YES), the sub CPU 1p2 writes the information read in S114 (the information stored in the second memory 1r2) to the first memory 1r1 (S116: restore processing ). In S116, the sub CPU 1p2 controls the MMU1d and the ASIC1f. Under the control of the sub CPU 1p2, the write signal xW is input from the MMU 1d to the selector 1s of the ASIC 1f, and the information read in S114 (the information stored in the second memory 1r2) is written to the first memory 1r1. done. After S116, the sub CPU 1p2 ends the routine.

When it is determined that the information is not normal (S115: NO), the sub CPU 1p2 controls the MMU 1d, GPIO 1e and ASIC 1f to initialize the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2 (S117: initialization processing). After S117, the sub CPU 1p2 ends the routine.

(Write process, first read process, and second read process)
With reference to FIG. 50, the signals output in the write process (S111), the first read process (S112) and the second read process (S114) and the states of the memories 1r1 and 1r2 will be described.

The selection signal Select is input from the GPIO1e to the selector 1s under the control of the sub CPU1p2. The selector 1s selects the second memory 1r2 when the selection signal Select is at HIGH level, and selects the first memory 1r1 when the selection signal Select is at LOW level.

The read signal xR and the write signal xW are respectively input from the MMU 1d to the selector 1s under the control of the sub CPU 1p2.

In the write process (S111), the select signal Select is at LOW level, the read signal xR is at LOW level, and the write signal xW is at HIGH level. In this case, the first memory 1r1 is selected, and information is first written to the first memory 1r1. Then, after a predetermined time (at the timing delayed by the DELAY circuit 1i), information is written to the second memory 1r2.

In the first read process (S112), the selection signal Select is at LOW level, the read signal xR is at HIGH level, and the write signal xW is at LOW level. In this case, the first memory 1r1 is selected and information is read from the first memory 1r1.

In the second read process (S114), the select signal Select is at HIGH level, the read signal xR is at HIGH level, and the write signal xW is at LOW level. In this case, the second memory 1r2 is selected and information is read from the second memory 1r2.

(Outline of the eleventh embodiment)
The gaming display device 1 of the eleventh embodiment has a sub CPU 1p2 communicably connected to the gaming machine 2, a first memory 1r1, and a second memory 1r2. 2. The information received from the game machine 2 is stored in the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2 so that the information written in the memory 1r2 is prior to the information written in the first memory 1r1. A writing process (S111) for writing with a staggered timing, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (an event such as a power failure occurred during the most recent writing) (S110: YES), the first memory 1r1 is written. a first reading process (S112) for reading out the information stored therein; a first determination process (S113) for determining whether the information read in the first reading process (S112) is normal; is not normal (S113: NO), the second read processing (S114) for reading the information written in the second memory 1r2, and the information read in the second read processing (S114) A restoration process (S116) for writing to the first memory 1r1 is executed.

The gaming system of the eleventh embodiment has a gaming machine 2 and a gaming display device 1 . The gaming display device 1 has a sub CPU 1p2 communicably connected to the gaming machine 2, a first memory 1r1, and a second memory 1r2, and the sub CPU 1p2 writes to the second memory 1r2 at the same time. The information received from the game machine 2 is written in the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2 at different timings so that the information received from the game machine 2 is prior to the information written in the first memory 1r1. When the writing process (S111) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (an event such as power failure occurred during the most recent writing) (S110: YES), the information written in the first memory 1r1 is read. 1 reading process (S112), a first determination process (S113) for determining whether the information read in the first reading process (S112) is normal, and determining that the information is not normal in the first determination process (S113: NO), the second read processing (S114) for reading the information written in the second memory 1r2, and the information read in the second read processing (S114) is stored in the first memory 1r1. Write restoration processing (S116) and execute.

According to the above configuration, information is written to the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2 at different timings in the writing process (S111), and the information written to the second memory 1r2 at the same time is written to the first memory 1r1. This is the information that precedes the information written in the . Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (an event such as power failure occurs), the information written in the first memory 1r1 is read, and when the information is not normal, the second memory Information written in 1r2 (information prior to information written in first memory 1r1) is written in first memory 1r1. As a result, even if the information is destroyed by an event such as power failure, the storage means can be restored.

Furthermore, in the game display device 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the sub CPU 1p2 reads the information read in the second readout process (S114) after the second readout process (S114) and before the restoration process (S116). Executes a second determination process (S115) for determining whether or not is normal, and if it is determined that the information is normal in the second determination process (S115: YES), performs a restoration process (S116), If it is determined in the second determination process that the information is not normal (S115: NO), the restoration process (S116) is not executed, and the initialization process (S117) for initializing the first memory 1r1 and the second memory 1r2. to run.

According to the above configuration, when the information written in the second memory 1r2 is not normal, it is possible to avoid the situation where the abnormal information is written in the first memory 1r1.

In this embodiment, the game display device is exemplified as a game device according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game device according to the present invention may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a server device, or a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine. Also, the game display device as the game device according to the present invention is not limited to a game display device functioning as a transmissive projector device, and may be one having a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). .

Also, the timing of writing to the first storage means and the second storage means is as long as the information written in the second storage means at the same point in time is prior to the information written in the first storage means. , is optional, and is not limited to the start of writing information to the second memory 1r2 at the same time as the writing of information to the first memory 1r1 is completed, as in the present embodiment.

As a predetermined condition, in the present embodiment, power failure occurs during the most recent writing to the storage means, but it is not limited to this. be a condition.

Although the FeRAM is exemplified as the first storage means and the second storage means in this embodiment, it is not limited to this, and may be EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) or flash memory. Further, for example, when an event other than power failure is applied as a predetermined condition, the first storage means and the second storage means are not limited to non-volatile memories as described above, and may be volatile memories (DRAM, SRAM, etc.). may be

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming device and gaming system according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(composition)
FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game display device 1 as a game device and the game system according to this embodiment. The gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 2 , a gaming display device 1 , a gaming media lending device 3 , and a server device 4 .

The game display device 1 includes a control unit 1p, and is communicably connected to each of the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4 via the control unit 1p. The control unit 1p is connected to the screen unit 11A, the projector main body 12, the operation unit 14, and the like (see FIG. 3), and controls the screen unit 11A and the projector main body 12. FIG. For example, when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 1p controls the display on the screen unit 11A according to the operation.

The control unit 1p, as shown in FIG. 51, has a main CPU (control means) 1p1, a sub CPU 1p2, and a RAM 1p3. The main CPU 1p1 and the sub CPU 1p2 operate independently of each other.

The main CPU 1p1 is connected to each of the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 so as to be capable of two-way communication.

The sub CPU 1p2 is communicably connected to each of the gaming machine 2 and the main CPU 1p1. Between the sub CPU 1p2 and the gaming machine 2, one-way communication from the gaming machine 2 to the sub CPU 1p2 is possible. On the other hand, two-way communication is possible between the sub CPU 1p2 and the main CPU 1p1.

The RAM 1p3 is connected to the sub CPU 1p2 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The RAM 1p3 temporarily stores information received from the game machine 2 by the sub CPU 1p2. The information that the sub CPU 1p2 receives from the gaming machine 2 includes the aforementioned game information (the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired game media or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history), and the like. Also, the sub CPU 1p2 reads information stored in the RAM 1p3 and transmits the information to the main CPU 1p3.

The gaming display device 1 further includes an SSD (Solid State Drive) 1l which is externally connectable storage means, a DC/DC converter (power supply means) 1j, and a capacitor (electricity storage means) 1k. In FIG. 51, thick lines are power supply lines and thin lines are signal lines. The SSD 1l is connected to the main CPU 1p1 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The SSD 1l stores various programs executed by the control unit 1p, and game data and system data written by the main CPU 1p1. The DC/DC converter 1j is connected so as to be able to supply power to the SSD 1l, and the capacitor 1k is mounted on the DC/DC converter 1j.

If power is cut off while data is being read from or written to the storage means, normal data reading or writing will not be performed, and the storage means and the game display device 1 will be affected. There is a risk that a malfunction may occur in the game system including this. Therefore, in the present invention, the power supply to the storage means is continued for a certain period of time even after the power is turned off, and the storage means is caused to complete the end processing, thereby avoiding the above problems. Also, while the storage means is executing the end processing, new access to the storage means from the main CPU 1p1 is prohibited, and new write processing, etc. are prohibited, so that the end processing of the storage means is appropriately and promptly completed. At the same time, it is constructed so as to complete the termination processing of the entire system including the termination processing of the storage means in a minimum amount of time.

(motion)
Processing executed by the main CPU 1p1 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 1p1 first executes read processing or write processing for the SSD 1l (S120). This process includes reading a program from the SSD 1l immediately after the game display device 1 is powered on and storing it in the RAM 1p3 via the sub CPU 1p2, and transferring information (game information, etc.) received from the gaming machine 2 to the SSD 1l. This is the writing process.

After S120, the main CPU 1p1 determines whether or not the processing of S120 is completed (S121).

When it is determined that the process of S120 has been completed (S121: YES), the main CPU 1p1 terminates the routine.

When it is determined that the process of S120 has not been completed (S121: NO), the main CPU 1p1 determines whether or not an abnormality (for example, power failure) has occurred in the power supply of the game display device 1 (S122: determination process).

When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the power supply (S122: NO), the main CPU 1p1 returns the process to S120.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the power supply (S122: YES), the main CPU 1p1 transmits a termination command to the SSD 1l (S123: termination command transmission processing). After the termination command transmission process (S123), the main CPU 1p1 terminates the routine without communicating with the SSD 1l. Upon receiving the termination command, the SSD 1l executes predetermined termination processing (for example, processing for transitioning the SSD 1l to a state where it can be removed safely).
In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the power supply, the main CPU 1p1 immediately stops the read processing and write processing to the SSD 1l, causes the SSD 1l to execute the end processing, and thereafter prohibits communication with the SSD 1l, so that the game system end processing. The SSD 1l that has received the termination command can complete the termination process by receiving the power stored in the capacitor 1k even if power is cut off during the termination process.

In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the power supply, the SSD 1l can execute termination processing while receiving power from the capacitor 1k. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the data stored in the SSD 1l from being damaged. In addition, when shutting down the entire gaming system, the main CPU 1p1 can execute termination processing of systems other than the SSD1l without waiting for completion of the termination processing of the SSD1l. As a result, the end processing of the entire gaming system can be completed in a minimum amount of time.

(Overview of the 12th embodiment)
The gaming display device 1 of the twelfth embodiment includes a main CPU 1p1 communicatively connected to the gaming machine 2, an SSD 1l communicatively connected to the main CPU 1p1, and a DC/DC converter 1j that supplies power to the SSD 1l. , and the DC/DC converter 1j is equipped with a capacitor 1k for storing electric power. The main CPU 1p1 performs determination processing (S122) to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the power supply of the game display device 1, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the power supply in the determination processing (S122: YES), the SSD 1l An end command transmission process (S123) for transmitting an end command is executed.

The gaming system of the twelfth embodiment has a gaming machine 2 and a gaming display device 1 . The game display device 1 has a main CPU 1p1 communicably connected to the gaming machine 2, an SSD 1l communicably connected to the main CPU 1p1, and a DC/DC converter 1j that supplies power to the SSD 1l. The DC/DC converter 1j is equipped with a capacitor 1k that stores power. The main CPU 1p1 performs determination processing (S122) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the power supply of the game display device 1, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the power supply in the determination processing (S122: YES), the SSD 1l An end command transmission process (S123) for transmitting an end command is executed.

According to the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs in the power supply of the game display device 1, the main CPU 1p1 transmits a termination command to the SSD 1l. SSD 1l can receive the power stored by capacitor 1k to complete the termination process. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the power supply of the game display device 1 while the SSD 1l is operating, it is possible to prevent the SSD 1l from malfunctioning.

Furthermore, in the game display device 1 of the twelfth embodiment, the main CPU 1p1 does not communicate with the SSD 1l after executing the end command transmission process (S123).

According to the above configuration, the SSD 1l is prohibited from new access from the main CPU 1p1 during the termination process, and no new write process or the like is performed, so that the termination process can be completed appropriately and promptly. Also, the main CPU 1p1 can execute termination processing and the like of other systems regardless of completion of the termination processing of the SSD 1l. Therefore, the termination processing of the entire system including the termination processing of SSD1l can be completed in the minimum amount of time.

In this embodiment, the game display device is exemplified as a game device according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game device according to the present invention may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a server device, or a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine. Also, the game display device as the game device according to the present invention is not limited to a game display device functioning as a transmissive projector device, and may be one having a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). .

Also, in the present embodiment, the SSD is exemplified as the storage means, but the present invention is not limited to this. The storage means may be other ROM, RAM, HDD (Hard Disk Drive), or the like.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a game device according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 60. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The game display device 1 includes a control unit 9 for controlling the operation of the game display device 1 as a whole. 53 and 54, the control unit 9 is attached to a predetermined location of the island facility 21 on which a plurality of gaming machines 2 are installed, on the rear side of the gaming machine 2. As shown in FIGS. In addition to the game machine 2, the island facility 21 is provided with a supply gutter for circulating game media such as pachinko balls and medals used in the game machine 2, a ball polisher, a counter, and the like. The following description of the vertical direction of the control unit 9 will correspond to the direction when it is attached to the island facility 21 . Also, the direction corresponding to the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 2 is defined as the width direction of the control unit 9 attached to the island equipment 21 .

As shown in FIG. 55, the control unit 9 includes a substrate 91 and a substrate case 93 capable of housing the substrate 91 therein. Further, the control unit 9 includes an exhaust fan 99 (see FIGS. 59 and 60) capable of discharging the air inside the board case 93 to the outside of the board case 93 . Various electronic components such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) are mounted on the board 91 . A heat sink 91 b is mounted in the center of the substrate 91 .

The board case 93 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The board case 93 is composed of a first case 94 located on one side in the width direction, a second case 95 located on the other side opposite to the one side in the width direction, and a fan cover 96 covering an exhaust fan 99 . Become. The fan cover 96 is fixed inside the first case 94 and partially exposed to the outside of the first case 94 through a notch 94 a formed in the upper portion of the first case 94 . A portion of the fan cover 96 exposed to the outside of the first case 94 is formed with an exhaust port 93 a through which the air exhausted from the exhaust fan 99 can be exhausted to the outside of the board case 93 .

As shown in FIG. 55, the substrate 91 is fixed to the first case 94 . A fan cover 96 covering the exhaust fan 99 is fixed to the first case 94 above the heat sink 91 b mounted on the board 91 . In other words, the exhaust fan 99 is positioned above the heat sink 91b, and can efficiently discharge the air warmed by heat radiation from the heat sink 91b to the outside of the substrate case 93. FIG.

The first case 94 is provided with a mounting base 94b for mounting to the island facility 21. As shown in FIG. An opening 93b for connecting a connector is formed in one side portion and the lower portion of the substrate case 93. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the fan cover 96 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG. The fan cover 96 has a first portion 97 defining a housing space for housing the exhaust fan 99 and a second portion 98 provided on the upper surface of the first portion 97 . The top surface of the first portion 97 is substantially horizontal. A circular opening 97 a is formed in the upper portion of the first portion 97 . An exhaust fan 99 is attached to the inside of the first portion 97 with screws 99a.

The second portion 98 is an annular protrusion formed to protrude upward from the peripheral edge of the opening 97a formed in the first portion 97 . The housing space for housing the exhaust fan 99 in the first portion 97 and the inner space of the second portion 98, which is an annular protrusion, communicate through an opening 97a. An opening at the upper end of the second portion 98 is the discharge port 93a.

The upward protrusion amount H of the second portion 98 is the largest on one side in the width direction. The upward protrusion amount H of the second portion 98 decreases toward the other side opposite to the one side in the width direction, and is the smallest on the other side in the width direction. Therefore, the discharge port 93a, which is the opening at the upper end of the second portion 98, is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that one side in the width direction is positioned higher than the other side.

A rib 98a and a rib 98c are formed in the discharge port 93a. The rib 98a has a circular shape when viewed from above, and is positioned substantially in the center of the discharge port 93a. A bulging portion 98b that bulges upward is formed in the central portion of the rib 98a. Rib 98 c is annular and located between rib 98 a and second portion 98 . As shown in FIG. 57, the upper end of the rib 98c is located above the upper end of the second portion 98, and the upper end of the portion of the rib 98a excluding the bulging portion 98b is above the upper end of the rib 98c. positioned. Therefore, the upper end of the second portion 98, the upper end of the rib 98c, the upper end of the portion of the rib 98a excluding the expanded portion 98b, and the expanded portion 98b of the rib 98a are raised in this order. That is, ribs 98a and 98c are formed in the discharge port 93a so as to become higher from the periphery of the discharge port 93a toward the center.

(Outline of the thirteenth embodiment)
The control unit 9 of the thirteenth embodiment includes a board 91 on which electronic components are mounted, a board case 93 capable of accommodating the board 91 therein, and capable of discharging the air inside the board case 93 to the outside of the board case 93. The substrate case 93 has an exhaust port 93a at its upper portion that can exhaust the air discharged from the exhaust fan 99 to the outside of the substrate case 93. The exhaust port 93a is oriented with respect to the horizontal plane. It is formed in a slanted shape.

According to the above configuration, the discharge port 93a is formed to be inclined with respect to the horizontal surface. It can be dropped below 93a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outlet 93a from being clogged with foreign matter.

Further, in the control unit 9 of the thirteenth embodiment, ribs 98a and 98c are formed in the discharge port 93a so as to become higher from the periphery of the discharge port 93a toward the center.

According to the above configuration, even if a foreign object (for example, a game ball dropped from the replenishment gutter arranged in the island facility 21) comes to the center of the discharge port 93a, The foreign matter can be dropped to the outside of the discharge port 93a.

In this embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the control unit 9 for controlling the operation of the entire gaming display device 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the present invention only needs to include a board case capable of housing a board inside, and may be, for example, the pachinko game machine 2a, the pachislot game machine 2b, the game medium lending device 3, or a unit for decorating the game machine. For example, it can also be applied to a control unit of a game device other than the game display device 1 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the discharge port 93a is provided with the rib 98a located substantially in the center of the discharge port 93a and the annular rib 98c arranged outside the rib 98a has been described. is not limited to The ribs arranged in the discharge port 93a may, for example, extend from the periphery of the discharge port 93a toward the center and become higher from the periphery toward the center of the discharge port 93a. .

<14th Embodiment>
Next, a game device according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. The gaming device according to the fourteenth embodiment is a gaming display device that is connected to the gaming machine 2 and displays various game information based on input signals, received signals, or player's operations. be.

As shown in FIG. 61, the gaming device J1 according to the fourteenth embodiment includes a housing J10 having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 61, the housing J10 consists of a front portion J101 that covers the edge of the front side of the screen J110, and a rear portion J102 that covers the entire rear surface of the device as shown in FIG. As will be described in detail later, a camera unit J12 (see FIGS. 63 to 66) is housed in the lower end of the housing J10. The camera unit J12 can capture an image of the lower side of the housing J10.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, on the right side of the lower end portion of the rear portion J102 of the housing J10, a cover J103 is arranged to cover the accommodation space of the camera unit J12 inside the housing J10. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the camera unit J12 is mounted between the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 inside the housing J10. More specifically, the liquid crystal base J104 is positioned above the accommodation space of the camera unit J12, and the camera unit base J105 is positioned below the accommodation space of the camera unit J12.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the camera unit J12 includes a storage case J121 having an upper case J122 and a lower case J123 that engage with each other. The accommodation case J121 accommodates an electronic device including an optical lens J127 in an internal space formed by an upper case J122 and a lower case J123. The camera unit J12 is accommodated in the housing J10 with the upper case J122 facing upward and the lower case J123 facing downward. In the following description, the surface of the upper case J122 of the camera unit J12 is called "upper surface J122a", and the surface of the lower case J123 is called "lower surface J123a".

An engaging claw portion J124 and a slide convex portion J125 are provided on the upper surface J122a side of the camera unit J12. The engaging claw portion J124 protrudes upward from the upper surface J122a and engages with an opening J104a formed in the liquid crystal base J104, as shown in FIGS. The camera unit J12 is fixed within the housing J10 by engaging the engaging claw portion J124 with the opening J104a. The engaging claw portion J124 is arranged in the upper surface J122a in a direction ( is positioned substantially at the center of the storage case J121 with respect to the "width direction W").

The slide protrusion J125 protrudes upward from the upper surface J122a. The slide projection J125 is connected to a first portion J125a extending along the width direction W at the rear end portion of the upper surface J122a in the mounting direction D, and to both ends of the first portion J125a. and a second portion J125b and a third portion J125c extending in the same direction. The length in the mounting direction D of the second portion J125b is sufficiently longer than the length in the mounting direction D of the third portion J125c.

The slide convex portion J125 is arranged side by side with the engaging claw portion J124 in the width direction W on the rear side in the mounting direction D of the upper case J122. That is, the slide protrusion J125 is formed at a position shifted from the center of the storage case J121 in the width direction W.

As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the liquid crystal base J104 is formed with a notch J104b for guiding the slide projection J125 of the camera unit J12. The length in the width direction W of the notch J104b is slightly longer than the length in the width direction W of the first portion J125a of the slide protrusion J125. The length in the mounting direction D of the notch J104b is slightly longer than the length in the mounting direction D of the second portion J125b of the slide projection J125.

As shown in FIG. 66, the optical lens J127 faces the outside of the storage case J121 on the rear side in the mounting direction D on the lower surface J123a side of the camera unit J12. On the side of the lower surface 123a of the camera unit J12, an annular convex portion J126 that protrudes downward from the lower surface J123a around the optical lens J127 is provided. The camera unit base J105 is formed with a notch J105a for guiding the projection J126 of the camera unit J12.

When the camera unit J12 is inserted into the housing J10 in the correct direction, the slide projection J125 formed on the upper surface J122a of the camera unit J12 contacts the edge of the notch J104b of the liquid crystal base J104. Also, a convex portion J126 formed on the lower surface J123a side of the camera unit J12 contacts the edge of the notch J105a of the camera unit base J105. The slide projection J125 slides in the notch J104b and the projection J126 slides in the notch J105a in the mounting direction D, respectively.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, when the camera unit J12 is to be inserted into the housing J10 with the side that is originally the rear side in the mounting direction D facing forward, the slide convex portion J125 will not move. The end abuts on the edge on the rear side in the mounting direction D of the liquid crystal base J104. More specifically, the end portion of the slide projection J125 is positioned in the mounting direction D at the portion opposite to the side where the notch J104b is formed across the portion where the opening J104a is formed in the liquid crystal base J104. It abuts against the edge on the rear side. Therefore, the camera unit J12 cannot be inserted into the housing J10.

FIG. 68 shows an attempt to insert the camera unit J12 into the housing J10 with the camera unit J12 turned upside down, that is, with the upper surface J122a facing downward and the lower surface J123a facing upward. indicate the case. As described above, the shape of the slide protrusion J125 formed on the upper surface J122a is different from the shape of the protrusion J126 formed on the lower surface J123a. Therefore, the notch J104b of the liquid crystal base J104 located above the housing space of the camera unit J12 cannot guide the protrusion J126. Further, the notch J105a of the camera unit base J105 positioned below the housing space of the camera unit J12 cannot guide the slide protrusion J125. Therefore, the camera unit J12 cannot be mounted inside the housing J10.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, a rib J105b projecting downward is formed along the mounting direction D on the lower surface of the camera unit base J105. In addition, in FIG. 69, the rib 105b is indicated by a thick line. The amount of downward protrusion of the rib J105b increases toward the front in the mounting direction D. As shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69, the camera unit J12 attached to the camera unit base J105 is inclined such that the front side in the mounting direction D is positioned higher than the rear side.

Since the camera unit J12 is tilted as described above, compared to the case where the camera unit J12 is arranged horizontally, the distance from the front of the apparatus to the electronic device housed in the housing case J121 of the camera unit J12 is greater. Distance L can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electronic device of the camera unit J12 from being damaged by static electricity when a player or the like touches the front surface of the device.

(Overview of the 14th embodiment)
The gaming device J1 of the 14th embodiment includes a camera unit J12 containing an electronic device in a storage case J121, and a liquid crystal base J104 and a camera unit base J105 to which the camera unit J12 can be attached. In the device J1, the storage case J121 has a slide protrusion J125 provided on the upper surface J122a side and a lower surface J123a side opposite to the upper surface J122a and having a different shape from the slide protrusion J125. The liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 are formed with a cutout J104b for guiding the slide projection J125 and a cutout J105a for guiding the projection J126. .

According to the above configuration, the slide convex portion J125 provided on the upper surface J122a side of the storage case J121 and the convex portion J126 provided on the lower surface J123a side have different shapes. Therefore, even if the camera unit J12 is attached to the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 in such a posture that the upper surface J122a and the lower surface J123a are opposite to each other, the notches J104b and J105a slide the convex portion J125 and convex portion J125. It is not possible to guide J126. Therefore, erroneous attachment of the camera unit J12 can be suppressed, and damage to members due to erroneous attachment can be suppressed.

In addition, in the game device J1 of the fourteenth embodiment, the electronic device is housed in the housing case J121 so that at least a portion of it faces the outside of the housing case J121, and the convex portion J126 is formed in the housing case J121 of the electronic device. formed around the part facing the exterior of the

According to the above configuration, the electronic device facing the outside of the storage case J121 can be protected by the protrusion J126.

Furthermore, in the gaming device J1 of the fourteenth embodiment, the electronic device is provided with an optical lens J127, and the convex portion J126 is formed around the optical lens J127.

According to the above configuration, since the optical lens J127 can be protected by the convex portion J126, it is possible to prevent the optical lens J127 from being scratched or damaged.

Further, in the gaming device J1 of the fourteenth embodiment, the slide convex portion J125 is arranged on the upper surface J122a such that the width direction W perpendicular to the mounting direction D of the camera unit J12 to the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 is the housing case. It is formed at a position shifted from the center of J121.

According to the above configuration, when the camera unit J12 is attached to the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 in a posture in which the front and back of the mounting direction D are reversed from the original, the slide convex portion J125 and the slide convex portion Since the positional relationship in the width direction W with respect to the notch J104B that guides J125 is displaced, the camera unit J12 cannot be attached. Therefore, erroneous attachment of the camera unit J12 can be more reliably suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming device J1 of the fourteenth embodiment, the end of the slide projection J125 is located at the end on the rear side in the mounting direction D on the upper surface J122a.

If the camera unit J12 is inserted into the housing space defined by the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 in an attitude different from the original one, the parts may be damaged. According to the above configuration, when the camera unit J12 is attached to the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 in a posture in which the front and rear directions of the attachment direction D are reversed from the original, the ends of the slide protrusions J125 are It abuts on the edge on the rear side in the mounting direction D of the liquid crystal base J104. Therefore, the camera unit J12 will not be inserted into the housing space defined by the liquid crystal base J104 and the camera unit base J105 in a posture that reverses the front-to-rear direction of the mounting direction D. Damage can be suppressed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a game display device that displays various game information has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention can be applied to a game device other than a game display device, such as a game medium lending device or a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine.

Also, in the present embodiment, the gaming device J1 including the camera unit J12 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming device J1 may include a housing unit other than the camera unit J12, such as a housing unit capable of housing an electronic device such as an LED lamp.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the case where the convex portion J126 is formed around the optical lens J127 facing the outside of the storage case J121 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The convex portion J126 may be formed around the electronic device facing the outside of the storage case J121 other than the optical lens J127. Furthermore, the convex portion J126 may not be formed around the electronic device facing the outside of the housing case J121.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the slide protrusion J125 is formed on the upper surface J122a at a position shifted from the center of the storage case J121 in the width direction W orthogonal to the mounting direction D. is not limited. The slide protrusion J125 may be formed in the center of the storage case J121 in the width direction W.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the end of the slide protrusion J125 is positioned at the end of the upper surface J122a on the rear side in the mounting direction D, but the position of the end of the slide protrusion J125 is not limited to this.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a game display device 2000 employing the light emitting device 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 77. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Moreover, the light emitting device 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment may be employed not only in a game display device but also in a game machine and the like, and is not particularly limited.

A game display device 2000 according to the fifteenth embodiment is a game display device in which a liquid crystal unit 2003 is incorporated. It may be a built-in game display device. The game display device 2000 includes a housing 2002, a liquid crystal unit 2003 accommodated in the housing 2002, a light emitting device 2001, and the like, as shown in FIG. The game display device 2000 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the left-right direction and the up-down direction shown in FIG. 71 to 77 also reflect the front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction shown in FIG.

The housing 2002 is composed of a plurality of members made of synthetic resin. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the housing 2002 includes a front panel 2006, a clear cover 2007, a protection panel 2008, and a rear panel 2009. The liquid crystal unit 2003, A control unit (not shown), an LED board 2004 forming part of the light emitting device 2001, and the like are accommodated. The front panel 2006 and the rear panel 2009 have a function as an outer panel 2030 that forms an accommodation space 2031 in which the liquid crystal unit 2003 and the like can be accommodated by engaging with each other. This outer panel 2030 may be included in the light emitting device 2001 . The liquid crystal unit 2003 has a vertically elongated rectangular planar shape, and on its front surface, the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired game media or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history, etc. are displayed in graphs and numerical values. It is a known liquid crystal unit formed with a display section for displaying game information. The liquid crystal unit 2003 is supported by a support frame (not shown) arranged inside the housing 2002 .

As shown in FIG. 70, the front panel 2006 has a frame shape with an opening 2006a formed in the center. The opening 2006a has a vertically elongated rectangular plane shape. The clear cover 2007 and protective panel 2008 are made of transparent synthetic resin. The clear cover 2007 has a planar size one size larger than the opening 2006a, and is attached to the front surface of the front panel 2006 so as to cover the entire opening 2006a from the front. The protective panel 2008 is arranged between the liquid crystal unit 2003 arranged in the opening 2006a and the clear cover 2007, and covers and protects the display section on the front surface of the liquid crystal unit 2003. FIG.

FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the inner side of the rear panel 2009 with the front panel 2006, liquid crystal unit 2003, etc. shown in FIG. 70 removed. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the light emitting device 2001 has an LED substrate 2004, a light guide panel 2010, and an outer panel 2030 forming a housing space 2031 inside. The LED board 2004 in this embodiment is composed of three boards 2004a to 2004c, an upper board 2004a, a right board 2004b and a left board 2004c. The upper substrate 2004a is installed on the upper part of the rear panel 2009 and has a rectangular planar shape elongated in the left and right direction. As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, a plurality of LEDs 2005 are surface-mounted on the front surface of the upper substrate 2004a. These LEDs 2005 are provided so as to be able to emit light forward. In other words, the irradiation surface 2005a for irradiating the light of the LED 2005 is formed on the front surface of the LED 2005. As shown in FIG. In addition, the irradiation of light from these LEDs 2005 is appropriately controlled by commands from the control unit. In addition, LED2005 of this embodiment is a well-known full-color LED. The plurality of LEDs 2005 are arranged apart from each other along each side in the vicinity of the upper side and the outer left and right sides of the upper substrate 2004a. In addition, the plurality of LEDs 2005 are arranged at regular intervals along each side except for the LEDs 2005 arranged near both ends of the upper side.

The right substrate 2004b is installed on the right side of the rear panel 2009 and has a vertically elongated rectangular planar shape. A plurality of LEDs 2005 are also surface-mounted on the front surface of the right substrate 2004b as shown in FIG. These LEDs 2005 are also provided so as to be able to emit light forward. The plurality of LEDs 2005 are arranged at regular intervals along the right side of the right substrate 2004b near the right side.

The left substrate 2004c is provided on the left side of the rear panel 2009 and has a vertically elongated rectangular planar shape. A plurality of LEDs 2005 are also surface-mounted on the front surface of the left substrate 2004c. These LEDs 2005 are also provided so as to be able to emit light forward. The plurality of LEDs 2005 are arranged at equal intervals along the left side near the left side of the left substrate 2004c.

The light guide panel 2010 in this embodiment is configured by combining three panels 2010a to 2010c, an upper panel 2010a, a right panel 2010b and a left panel 2010c, which are made of transparent synthetic resin. As shown in FIG. 74, the upper panel 2010a is formed in an inverted U shape, with a long portion 2011 extending in the left-right direction and downward extending from each end of the long portion 2011. and two short portions 2012 and 2013. The right panel 2010b is elongated in the vertical direction, is formed substantially in the same manner as the short portion 2012, and is formed so as to be continuously connectable to the lower end of the short portion 2012. As shown in FIG. The left panel 2010c is also elongated in the vertical direction, is formed in substantially the same manner as the short portion 2013, and is formed so as to be continuously connectable to the lower end of the short portion 2013. As shown in FIG.

Although the long portion 2011 and the short portions 2012 and 2013 extend in orthogonal directions, they have substantially the same configuration. Description is omitted. Note that the short portions 2012 and 2013 have substantially the same configuration as the configuration of the long portion 2011 tilted by 90°. Further, since the right panel 2010b and the left panel 2010c have the same configuration as the short portions 2012 and 2013, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the elongated portion 2011 is arranged above the first light guide portion 2015 and the first light guide portion 2015, and the lower end thereof is connected to the upper end of the first light guide portion 2015. and a second light guide portion 2016 .

As shown in FIG. 76, the first light guiding portion 2015 faces (adjacent to) an irradiation surface 2005a that emits light from the LED 2005, and receives light from the irradiation surface 2005a. and individual light guide portions 2015b. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the first light entrance portion 2015a has a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction. In addition, the first light entrance portion 2015a has a reflection surface 2015c that reflects upward the incident light from the LED 2005 . The reflective surface 2015c is formed on the front surface of the first light entrance section 2015a and extends in the left-right direction. Also, as shown in FIG. 76, the reflecting surface 2015c is formed to form an angle of approximately 45° with respect to the horizontal plane. The inclination angle of the reflecting surface 2015c is not particularly limited as long as the light from the LED 2005 can be reflected toward the second light guide section 2016, and may be set as appropriate.

The plurality of individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged at equal intervals along the left-right direction so as to individually correspond to each LED 2005 in the front upper portion of the first light entrance portion 2015a. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the plurality of individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged so that the distances between them and the plurality of LEDs 2005 arranged at regular intervals are the same. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, the individual light guide portion 2015b is arranged at a position where its center overlaps the center of the corresponding LED 2005 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, each individual light guide portion 2015b has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and its top surface is a light exit surface 2015d curved in an arc. As shown in FIG. 76, the light from the LED 2005 is diffused and reflected upward by the reflecting surface 2015c. As indicated by the arrow in FIG. 77, the light emitting surface 2015d collects the light reflected and diffused by the reflecting surface 2015c and emits the light vertically upward (one direction). That is, the individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged in the direction in which the individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged (that is, in the horizontal direction in the individual light guide portions 2015b arranged in the horizontal direction, and in the vertical direction in the short portions 2012, 2013, etc.). The width of the individual light guide portion 2015b (in the vertical direction) is set to a predetermined range L2001, and the light of the corresponding LED 2005 and reflected by the reflecting surface 2015c is diffused in one direction (perpendicular to the arrangement direction). direction).

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the second light guide section 2016 includes a second light entrance section 2016a which faces the plurality of light exit surfaces 2015d in the vertical direction and receives light emitted from the light exit surfaces 2015d, and a second light entrance section 2016a. 2 and a light-emitting portion 2016b that reflects the light incident from the light-incident portion 2016a and emits light. The second light entrance portion 2016a extends in the vertical direction and elongates in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 76, the second light entrance portion 2016a is partially connected to the first light guide portion 2015 at its lower end. A portion of the lower surface of the second light entrance portion 2016a that vertically faces the plurality of light exit surfaces 2015d is vertically separated from the light exit surfaces 2015d. The second light entrance portion 2016a guides the light from the light exit surface 2015d vertically upward.

The light emitting portion 2016b is formed integrally connected to the upper end of the second light entering portion 2016a. As shown in FIG. 76, the light-emitting portion 2016b has a reflecting surface 2016c formed by a plurality of surfaces that are gradually inclined from the top to the rear end. The reflecting surface 2016c forwardly reflects the light guided upward by the second light entrance portion 2016a to emit light.

Next, the path of light entering the light guide panel 2010 will be described. Light entering the light guide panel 2010 from the LED 2005 first travels forward through the first light entrance portion 2015a, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the light from the LED 2005 is reflected by the reflective surface 2015c, diffuses upward, and is condensed by the light exit surface 2015d of the individual light guide portion 2015b and emitted vertically upward. is emitted to Since the individual light guide portion 2015b is provided corresponding to each LED 2005, most of the light from one LED 2005 is emitted from the corresponding one individual light guide portion 2015b in one direction (the arrangement direction of the individual light guide portions 2015b). The light is emitted in an orthogonal direction: vertically upward in FIG. That is, each individual light guide portion 2015b emits light in one direction while diffusing the light from the first light entrance portion 2015a in a predetermined range L2001 for each LED 2005. FIG.

Next, the light emitted from the individual light guide portion 2015b (the first light guide portion 2015) enters the second light entrance portion 2016a of the second light guide portion 2016. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the light entering the second light guiding section 2016 travels vertically upward in the second light entering section 2016a. After that, the light is reflected by the reflecting surface 2016c of the light emitting section 2016b and emitted forward. At this time, as shown in FIG. 77, light is emitted from each LED 2005 in each predetermined range L2002 of the light emitting section 2016b (that is, the range corresponding to the predetermined range L2001 that is the width of the individual light guide section 2015b). Let In this way, since the light of each LED 2005 is emitted in one direction from the individual light guide portion 2015b, the light entering the second light guide portion 2016 also travels in one direction at the second light entrance portion 2016a and emits light. Light from each LED 2005 can be reflected and emitted in each fixed range L2002 on the reflecting surface 2016c of the portion 2016b. That is, in the light-emitting part 2016b, the light of one LED2005 becomes difficult to mix with the light of other LED2005 adjacent to the said one LED2005. For this reason, it becomes possible to make the light of each LED2005 emit light clearly.

As described above, according to the light emitting device 2001 of this embodiment, the plurality of individual light guide portions 2015b formed corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2005 direct light from the first light entrance portion 2015a to a predetermined Since the light is emitted in one direction while being diffused in the range L2001 of , the light of each LED 2005 can be clearly emitted in each fixed range L2002 in the light emitting section 2016b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the colors of light emitted from adjacent LEDs 2005 from being mixed.
For example, it is possible to suppress mixing of emitted colors by directly installing LEDs in places around the housing 2002 where light is desired to be emitted. rises. Furthermore, it becomes necessary to provide the LED substrate 2004 to the outside of the housing 2002, which deteriorates the appearance. However, in this embodiment, by providing a plurality of individual light guide portions 2015b in the light guide panel 2010, it is possible to suppress the number of LEDs 2005 to be installed as described above, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost. becomes. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to install the LED substrate 2004 to the outside of the housing 2002, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance. In addition, since the light from the LEDs 2005 is guided by the light guide panel 2010 , electronic components such as the LED substrate 2004 can be compactly arranged within the housing 2002 .

<Modification>
As a modification, the reflecting surface 2015c may not be formed on the first light guide section 2015. FIG. In this case, the LEDs 2005 are arranged to face the individual light guide portions 2015b, and the individual light guide portions 2015b diffuse the light from the facing LEDs 2005 within a predetermined range L2001 and emit the light in one direction. Also in this case, the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Further, in the above-described embodiment and modifications, light emitting means other than the LED 2005 may be employed.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a game display device 2000 employing the light emitting device 2001 according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 78 to 83. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Also, the light emitting device 2001 according to the sixteenth embodiment may be employed not only in game display devices but also in game machines and the like, and is not particularly limited.

The game display device 2000 according to the sixteenth embodiment is also a game display device in which the liquid crystal unit 2003 is incorporated. It may be a built-in game display device. The game display device 2000 includes a housing 2002, a liquid crystal unit 2003 accommodated in the housing 2002, a light emitting device 2001, and the like, as shown in FIG. Note that the front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction shown in FIG. 70 are also shown reflected in FIGS.

The light emitting device 2001 of the game display device 2000 is substantially the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment described above, and includes an LED substrate 2004, a light guide panel 2010 having an upper panel 2010a, and an outer panel 2030 inside which a housing space 2031 is formed. including. As shown in FIG. 78, the upper panel 2010a is formed in an inverted U shape, with a long portion 2011 extending in the left-right direction and extending downward from each end of the long portion 2011. and two short portions 2012 and 2013.

Although the long portion 2011 and the short portions 2012 and 2013 extend in orthogonal directions, they have substantially the same configuration. Description is omitted. Note that the short portions 2012 and 2013 have substantially the same configuration as the configuration of the long portion 2011 tilted by 90°. The long part 2011 is arranged above the first light guide part 2015 and the first light guide part 2015, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the first light guide part 2015, as in the fifteenth embodiment described above. and a second light guide portion 2016 .

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the first light guiding portion 2015 faces the irradiation surface 2005a that irradiates the light of the LED 2005, and receives the light from the irradiation surface 2005a. and individual light guide portions 2015b. As shown in FIG. 78, the first light entrance portion 2015a has a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction. As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the first light incident portion 2015a has a first light incident end surface 2015a1 facing the irradiation surface 2005a, into which light enters, and light incident from the first light incident end surface 2015a1. has a reflective surface 2015c configured to reflect the

As shown in FIG. 79, the reflective surface 2015c is formed on the front surface of the first light entrance section 2015a and extends along the extending direction of the first light entrance section 2015a (here, the horizontal direction). Also, the reflecting surface 2015c is formed to form an angle of approximately 45° with respect to the horizontal plane. The inclination angle of the reflecting surface 2015c is not particularly limited as long as the light from the LED 2005 can be reflected toward the second light guide section 2016, and may be set as appropriate. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 80, the reflecting surface 2015c is formed in a sector shape at both left and right ends.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first light entrance portion 2015a faces the fan-shaped reflecting surface 2015c1 and the reflecting surface 2015c1 vertically at both ends in the horizontal direction (only the right end is shown in the drawings). It has a light exit surface 2015d1 formed by The LED 2005 is arranged to face a portion of the first light incident end surface 2015a1 facing the reflecting surface 2015c1 in the front-rear direction. That is, the light emitted from the LED 2005 is radially diffused by the reflecting surface 2015c1 and directed toward the light emitting surface 2015d1. The light emitting surface 2015d1 is a curved surface having a predetermined first curvature radius R1, and emits light reflected by the reflecting surface 2015c1 along the normal direction of the light emitting surface 2015d1.

The second light guide section 2016 has a second light entrance section 2016a and a light emission section 2016b, which are substantially similar to those of the fifteenth embodiment described above. As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the second light entrance portion 2016a has a second light entrance end surface 2016a1 into which light emitted from the light exit surfaces 2015d and 2015d1 of the individual light guide portions 2015b enters. The second light incident end surface 2016a1 has a portion other than both ends in the left-right direction (that is, the portion facing the light exit surface 2015d) formed flat, and both ends (the portion facing the light exit surface 2015d1) have a first radius of curvature. It is formed into a curved surface having a curvature radius R2 larger than R1. Further, in this embodiment, the curved portions at both ends of the second light incident end face 2016a1 have a shape similar to the light exiting face 2015d1.

As shown in FIG. 78, the light emitting portion 2016b is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the long portion 2011 and has an inverted U shape along the outer periphery of the second light guide portion 2016. , and three straight portions 2018 and 2019 . A straight portion 2018 of the light emitting portion 2016b extends linearly in the left-right direction. The two straight portions 2019 of the light emitting portion 2016b extend linearly along the vertical direction. Each rounded portion 2017 of the light emitting portion 2016b has a second radius of curvature R3 larger than the first radius of curvature R1, as shown in FIG. Further, each rounded portion 2017 in this embodiment has a shape similar to the light exit surface 2015d1. Each rounded portion 2017 is arranged between a straight portion 2018 and two straight portions 2019 and both ends thereof are connected to the straight portions 2018 and 2019 .

As shown in FIG. 81, the straight portions 2018 and 2019 are arranged at positions overlapping light emitted from the light exit surface 2015d1, that is, light emitted along the normal direction of the light exit surface 2015d1.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the light-emitting portion 2016b has a reflecting surface 2016c formed by a plurality of surfaces that are gradually inclined from the top to the rear end. The reflecting surface 2016c is formed along the extending direction of the light emitting section 2016b. That is, the reflective surface 2016c also has an inverted U shape. The reflecting surface 2016c reflects forward the light guided upward by the second light entrance portion 2016a to emit light. In addition, the reflecting surface 2016c has a curvature radius similar to the second curvature radius R3 of the rounded portion 2017 at the rounded portion 2017 . Therefore, the reflecting rounded surface 2016c1 formed on the curved portion 2017 of the reflecting surface 2016c can easily reflect the light emitted from the light emitting surface 2015d1, and the curved portion 2017 of the light emitting portion 2016b can easily emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the light-emitting portion 2016b has seven auxiliary light-emitting surfaces 2016c2 near the rounded portions 2017. As shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 81, among the seven auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2, the three upper auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are arranged at the straight portion 2018 side end of the rounded portion 2017 and the rounded portion 2017 side end of the straight portion 2018. They are formed side by side in the left-right direction. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 83, one auxiliary light-emitting surface 2016c2 is formed at the straight portion 2018 side end of the rounded portion 2017, and the two auxiliary light-emitting surfaces 2016c2 are formed at the rounded portion 2017 of the straight portion 2018. It is formed at the side edge. These two auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are formed between the curved portion 2017 and a portion perpendicular to the normal line parallel to the upper side of the light emitting surface 2015d1 of the straight portion 2018 in FIG. These three auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are formed as planes capable of forwardly reflecting and emitting light from the light emitting surface 2015d1 while including the direction perpendicular to the normal to the light emitting surface 2015d1 in the in-plane direction. there is

In addition, among the seven auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2, the lower four auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are vertically aligned at the straight portion 2019 side end of the rounded portion 2017 and the rounded portion 2017 side end of the straight portion 2019. formed. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, one auxiliary light emitting surface 2016c2 is formed on the straight portion 2019 side end of the rounded portion 2017, and the three auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are formed on the curved portion 2017 of the straight portion 2019. It is formed at the side edge. These three auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are formed between the curved portion 2017 and a portion orthogonal to the normal line parallel to the right side of the light emitting surface 2015d1 of the straight portion 2019 in FIG. These four auxiliary light emitting surfaces 2016c2 are formed as planes capable of forwardly reflecting the light from the light emitting surface 2015d1 and emitting light while including the direction perpendicular to the normal to the light emitting surface 2015d1 in the in-plane direction. there is

Next, among the paths of light incident on the light guide panel 2010, the paths of light emitted from the LEDs 2005 facing the portion of the first light incident end face 2015a1 facing the reflecting surface 2015c1 will be described. Light entering the light guide panel 2010 from the LED 2005 travels forward from the first light incident end surface 2015a1, is reflected by the reflecting surface 2015c1 toward the light emitting surface 2015d1, and travels from the light emitting surface 2015d1 along the normal direction of the light emitting surface 2015d1. Idemitsu.

Next, the light emitted from the light exit surface 2015d1 enters from the curved surface portion of the second light entrance end surface 2016a1 of the second light guide section 2016. As shown in FIG. The light entering the second light guide portion 2016 travels in the normal direction of the light exit surface 2015d1 at the second light entrance portion 2016a, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. The curved surface portion of the second light incident end surface 2016a1 (the portion facing the light exit surface 2015d1) is configured to be a surface perpendicular to the normal line of the light exit surface 2015d1. After that, the light is reflected by the reflecting surface 2016c of the light emitting section 2016b and emitted forward.

More specifically, in the portions of the straight portions 2018 and 2019 perpendicular to the normal to the light exit surface 2015d1, light is reflected forward by the reflecting surfaces 2016c formed in the portions to emit light. At the portion between the portion of the straight portions 2018 and 2019 perpendicular to the normal to the light output surface 2015d1 and the rounded portion 2017, and the end portion of the curved portion 2017 on the side of the straight portions 2018 and 2019, each auxiliary light emission Light is reflected forward by the surface 2016c2 to emit light. This is because the auxiliary light emitting surface 2016c2 is configured such that the light from the light emitting surface 2015d1 can be reflected forward while the direction perpendicular to the normal to the light emitting surface 2015d1 is included in the in-plane direction. be. At the central portion of the rounded portion 2017, light is reflected forward by the reflecting curved surface 2016c1 to emit light. Therefore, the light of the LED 2005 can be clearly emitted from the rounded portion 2017 and the portions of the straight portions 2018 and 2019 connected to the rounded portion 2017 near the curved portion 2017 .

As described above, according to the light-emitting device 2001 of the present embodiment, the light-emitting surfaces are formed between the curved portions 2017 and the portions of the straight portions 2018 and 2019 of the light-emitting portion 2016b perpendicular to the normal to the light-emitting surfaces 2015d1. Since the auxiliary light emitting surface 2016c2 is formed so that the direction orthogonal to the normal to 2015d1 is included in the in-plane direction, the light emitted from the light emitting surface 2015d1 is easily emitted from the auxiliary light emitting surface 2016c2. Therefore, the straight portions 2018 and 2019 connected to the end portion of the rounded portion 2017 can emit light clearly even in the vicinity of the curved portion 2017 .

<Modification>
As a modification, the auxiliary light emitting surface 2016 c 2 may be formed only on the straight portions 2018 and 2019 and may not be formed on the rounded portion 2017 . In this case, it is sufficient that the entire reflecting rounded surface 2016c1 in the curved portion 2017 can reflect forward the light emitted from the light emitting surface 2015d1. Further, in the above-described embodiment and modified examples, light emitting means other than the LED 2005 may be employed.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a game display device 2000 employing the light emitting device 2001 according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 70, 78 and 84. FIG. Components identical or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Moreover, the light emitting device 2001 according to the seventeenth embodiment may be employed not only in game display devices but also in game machines and the like, and is not particularly limited.

The game display device 2000 according to the seventeenth embodiment is also a game display device in which the liquid crystal unit 2003 is built. It may be a built-in game display device. The game display device 2000 includes a housing 2002, a liquid crystal unit 2003 accommodated in the housing 2002, a light emitting device 2001, and the like, as shown in FIG. Note that the front-rear direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction shown in FIG. 70 are reflected in FIG. 84 as well.

The light emitting device 2001 of the game display device 2000 is substantially the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment described above, and includes an LED substrate 2004, a light guide panel 2010 having an upper panel 2010a, and an outer panel 2030 inside which a housing space 2031 is formed. including. The LED board 2004 is supported by a rear panel 2009 forming part of the housing 2002, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 78, the upper panel 2010a is formed in an inverted U shape, with a long portion 2011 extending in the left-right direction and extending downward from each end of the long portion 2011. and two short portions 2012 and 2013.

Although the long portion 2011 and the short portions 2012 and 2013 extend in orthogonal directions, they have substantially the same configuration. Description is omitted. Note that the short portions 2012 and 2013 have substantially the same configuration as the configuration of the long portion 2011 tilted by 90°. As in the fifteenth embodiment described above, the long part 2011 is arranged above the first light guide part 2015 and the first light guide part 2015 as shown in FIG. It has a second light guide portion 2016 connected to the upper end of the portion 2015 .

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 84, the first light guide portion 2015 faces (adjacent to) an irradiation surface 2005a that emits light from the LEDs 2005 mounted on the LED substrate 2004, and the light from the irradiation surface 2005a enters. and a plurality of individual light guide portions 2015b. The first light entrance portion 2015a has a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction. The first light incident portion 2015a is configured to face (adjacent to) the irradiation surface 2005a and receive light therethrough, and to reflect the light received from the first light incident end surface 2015a1. has a reflective surface 2015c.

As shown in FIG. 84, the reflective surface 2015c is formed on the front surface of the first light entrance section 2015a and extends along the extending direction of the first light entrance section 2015a (here, the horizontal direction). Also, the reflecting surface 2015c is formed to form an angle of approximately 45° with respect to the horizontal plane. The inclination angle of the reflecting surface 2015c is not particularly limited as long as the light from the LED 2005 can be reflected toward the second light guide section 2016, and may be set as appropriate.

The plurality of individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged at equal intervals along the left-right direction so as to individually correspond to each LED 2005 in the front upper portion of the first light entrance portion 2015a. Each individual light guide portion 2015b has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and its upper surface is a light exit surface 2015d curved in an arc shape. As shown in FIG. 84, the light from the LED 2005 is diffused and reflected upward by the reflecting surface 2015c. As indicated by an arrow in FIG. 84, the light emitting surface 2015d collects the light reflected and diffused by the reflecting surface 2015c and emits the light vertically upward (one direction). That is, the individual light guide portions 2015b are aligned in the direction in which the individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged (that is, in the individual light guide portions 2015b arranged in the horizontal direction, the individual light guide portions 2015b are arranged in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction). In 2015b, the width in the vertical direction) is set to a predetermined range, and the light from the corresponding LED 2005 that has been reflected by the reflecting surface 2015c is diffused and emitted in one direction (direction perpendicular to the arrangement direction).

As shown in FIG. 84, the second light guide section 2016 includes a second light entrance section 2016a that faces the plurality of light exit surfaces 2015d in the vertical direction and receives light emitted from the light exit surfaces 2015d, and a second light entrance section 2016a. and a light-emitting portion 2016b that reflects light incident from the portion 2016a and emits light. As shown in FIG. 78, the second light entrance portion 2016a extends vertically and horizontally and elongates. As shown in FIG. 84, the second light entrance portion 2016a is partially connected to the first light guide portion 2015 at its lower end. A portion of the lower surface of the second light entrance portion 2016a that vertically faces the plurality of light exit surfaces 2015d is vertically separated from the light exit surfaces 2015d. The second light entrance portion 2016a guides the light from the light exit surface 2015d to the light emitting portion 2016b.

As shown in FIG. 84, the light emitting portion 2016b is formed integrally connected to the upper end (tip) of the second light entering portion 2016a. The light-emitting portion 2016b has a reflecting surface 2016c formed by a plurality of surfaces that are gradually inclined from the top to the rear end. The reflecting surface 2016c forwardly reflects the light guided upward by the second light entrance portion 2016a to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 84, the light guide panel 2010 (here, the elongated portion 2011) as the light guide member is the first input as the first portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first portion 2015a). It includes a light portion 2015a and a second portion 2014 extending upward from an upper surface 2015a2 of the first light entrance portion 2015a and composed of an individual light guide portion 2015b and a second light guide portion 2016, and is substantially L-shaped. It has a shaped cross section. The first portion 2015a is housed within the housing space 2031 . The second portion 2014 is accommodated in the accommodation space 2031 at the lower ends of the individual light guide portions 2015b and the second light entrance portion 2016a, but the other portions (the portion above the lower end of the second light entrance portion 2016a and part of the light emitting portion 2016b) is exposed to the outside. Further, in the present embodiment, the end portion 2009a of the rear panel 2009, which is a part of the outer panel 2030, and the rear surface 2016a2 of the second light entrance portion 2016a are in contact with each other (adjacent). A rear surface (front surface) 2016a2 of the second light entrance portion 2016a of the second light guide portion 2016 is formed with a convex portion 2016a3 that protrudes rearward as shown in FIGS.

The projection (protrusion) 2016a3 protrudes from the lower end of the rear surface 2016a2 of the second portion 2014 and extends along the extending direction of the second portion 2014 (horizontal direction at the central portion and vertical direction at both ends). , and is formed over the entire length of the second portion 2014 . Further, the convex portion 2016 a 3 is formed so as to be able to approach (adjacent) the inner surface of the rear panel 2009 when the lower portion of the light guide panel 2010 is accommodated in the accommodation space 2031 of the outer panel 2030 . That is, when the light guide panel 2010 is attached to the outer panel 2030 (housing 2002), the convex portion 2016a is located inside the housing 2002 and is not exposed to the outside. As described above, it is possible to secure a longer creepage distance against static electricity that short-circuits to the circuit on the LED substrate 2004 through the gap between the light guide panel 2010 and the rear panel 2009, compared to the case where the convex portion 2016a3 is not formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electronic components on the LED substrate 2004 from being damaged by static electricity.

84, the projection length from the rear surface 2016a2 of the convex portion 2016a3 in this embodiment is the first creepage distance from the light emitting portion 2016b to the first light incident end surface 2015a1 via the rear surface 2016a2 and the upper surface 2015a2. L2003 (the distance of the portion indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 84 on the rear side of the light guide panel 2010) extends from the light emitting portion 2016b through the front surface 2016a4 of the second portion 2014 and the bottom surface 2015a3 of the first portion 2015a to the first light incident end surface. It is set to be longer than the second creepage distance L2004 (the distance of the portion indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 84 on the front side of the light guide panel 2010) reaching 2015a1. In other words, from the portion where the rear surface 2016a2 of the light guide panel 2010 and the end portion 2009a of the rear panel 2009 are adjacent (contacting portion) within the first creepage distance L2003, the first input through the upper surface 2015a2. A portion where the creepage distance to the light end surface 2015a1 is within the second creepage distance L2004 and the front surface 2016a4 of the light guide panel 2010 and the edge of the front panel 2006 (here, upper edge: not shown) are adjacent to each other (In this embodiment, they are in contact with each other) to the first light incident end surface 2015a1 via the lower surface 2015a3 of the first portion 2015a or more. As a result, when the player touches the light emitting portion 2016b of the light guide panel 2010, the static electricity that enters from the back side of the outer panel 2030 (housing 2002) near the LED board 2004 is prevented. Since it is possible to secure a creepage distance equal to or greater than the creepage distance against static electricity entering from the front side of the LED 2005, it is possible to prevent electronic parts such as the LED 2005 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the light emitting device 2001 of this embodiment, the light guide panel 2010 having an L-shaped cross section is provided, and the rear surface 2016a2 of the second portion 2014 of the light guide panel 2010 is formed with the convex portion 2016a1. . Therefore, for example, even if the user touches the light-emitting portion 2016b, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being transmitted to the LED 2005, short-circuiting the LED 2005, and damaging it. The structure of the above-described light-emitting device 2001 is not limited to the game display device, and can be applied to the above-described pachinko game machine 2a, pachi-slot game machine 2b, game medium lending device 3, a game machine decoration unit, or the like. can also be applied.

Although the embodiments according to the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications.

The game display device may apply a different screen unit for each game machine, or may apply the same type of screen unit for each so-called island.

The game display device may be configured as a transmissive projector device and may be configured to be replaceable with a screen unit having a different screen form. may Further, for example, the light projected from the projector body may directly enter the incident surface on the back side of the screen without using a reflector.

The types of replaceable screen units are not limited to the three types in the above embodiment, and may be two types or four types or more as long as the screens have different forms. In addition, the material of the screen may be different without being limited to the form of the screen.

The position of the light-emitting surface is not limited to the left and right ends of the front surface, and may be, for example, the top or bottom of the front surface, or the side surface.

The second display surface is not limited to the shape described above, and may be, for example, a parallelogram, a rhombus, or a circular shape as long as it has a thickness in front of the first display surface.

An operation unit including buttons may be provided integrally with the screen unit.

When replacing the screen unit, it may be necessary to change the projection data corresponding to the projected image or optically correct the projected image because the form and characteristics of the screen are different. In order to cope with such a case, the control unit of the game display device stores in advance the setting information related to the projected image data and the optical correction data according to the form of each screen, etc. The setting information may be called and applied.

In addition, in order to realize a configuration in which the corresponding setting information can be applied when replacing the screen unit, (1) a process for determining whether or not the LED board (cable) is connected is provided in the control unit, and (2) the screen unit A separate control device is provided in the screen unit, and when the control unit of the housing is started after the screen unit is replaced, the control device transmits a specific command to the control unit, and the control unit determines in which screen unit the control device is connected. or (3) display a setting screen by operating a button on the operation unit, and enable the administrator to input the type of screen unit after replacement as setting information on this setting screen. .

Such setting information can be said to be information that determines by what projection method (method) one image data is to be projected. Also, the setting information may be changeable from the server device as the hall computer, or if the setting information is changed in one game display device by the master-slave system, it is changed in the other game display devices in the same way. may

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the operation of inserting medals by the player (that is, the operation of inserting the medals in hand into the medal insertion slot, or operating the MAX bet button or the 1 bet button for the credited medals. When the game is started by the operation of inserting a coin into the game, and when the game is finished and medals are to be paid out, the hopper device is driven to pay out the medals from the medal payout port or to credit the medals. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a player inserts game media necessary for a game, plays a game based on the game, and grants a privilege (e.g., pays out medals) based on the result of the game. be able to. In other words, not only is the game medium inserted (played) and paid out by the physical actions of the player, but also the main control circuit (main control board) itself electromagnetically transfers the game medium held by the player. It may be managed systematically and the game can be played without medals. Further, the game media held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game media management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit (main control board) to manage the game media.

In this case, the game media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and communicates with an external game media handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. A game medium lending operation (i.e., an operation of providing a necessary game medium when a player inserts a game medium) or winning a prize related to the payout of a game medium ( game media payout operation (that is, the action of acquiring the game media necessary for paying out the game media to the player) when the relevant combination is established), or the game media to be used for the game What is necessary is just to be able to perform the operation|movement which records electromagnetically. The game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of owned game media on the front of the gaming machine based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where is operated directly, if it has a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and if an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the external game media handling device , it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money, etc. from a mobile terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As a game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like for prize exchange, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent on the side of the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. Moreover, it is not limited to ejecting the recording medium, and cash or cash equivalents may be ejected, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game parlor can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to perform a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information such as a one-time password that is known only to the player may be set, or the player may be stored by imaging means provided in the game machine or game medium handling device.

As described above, this game medium management device may allow a game to be played only without medals, or a game medium may be inserted (played) by a physical action of a player, and a game medium may be paid out, and a form in which a game can be played without medals, or in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above. Based on the transmission of the result, the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method, and a method of controlling display can be adopted. .

In the above description, the game medium management device is applied to a pachislot machine. Player's game media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce selectors, hopper devices, etc. inside the game machine, compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, thereby reducing the cost of the game machine. And not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of devices. It will also reduce power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. There is a display device that includes a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image onto a front screen (projection target) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Also, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and it has been proposed to configure such a game display device with a projector device. .

However, in recent years, there is a demand for a display form of a game display device that conforms to the layout and visual effects of a game arcade, as well as the design of a corresponding game machine. However, it is not possible to freely change such a display form, and there is room for improvement in terms of the design and diversity of the display form.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points. An object of the present invention is to provide a display device for

(Appendix A1)
A game display device (for example, a game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information about a game as a projection image, and the projection A light passage surface (for example, an aperture surface 10A) through which light projected from means passes through, and a projection target portion (for example, a screen 110A) on which a projected image is projected by the light passing through the light passage surface. , wherein the projection target part has a display surface (for example, a (first) display surface 1101) on which a projection image is projected, is arranged replaceably with respect to the light passage surface, and the display surface is 2. The projector is characterized in that the visual impression of the projected image can be changed in accordance with the replacement of the projected portion.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projected portion. It is possible to freely change the display form by simply changing the display form, and the design and diversity of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix A2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention has at least another display surface (e.g., light emitting surface 111a) different from the display surface, and the other display surface is capable of displaying by a method different from the display of the projected image. It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the information about the game by dividing the display surface on which the projected image is displayed and the other display surface. Since it is possible to display by different methods, it is possible to further improve the design and diversity of the display form.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. There is a display device that includes a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image onto a front screen (projection target) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Also, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and it has been proposed to configure such a game display device with a projector device. . Some of such projector apparatuses have enhanced visual effects by deforming the screen into an uneven shape (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147828).

However, in the method disclosed in JP-A-2012-147828, since the entire front and back surfaces of the screen are uneven, the projection distance from the projection means to the screen becomes significantly uneven depending on the unevenness. When this screen is applied to a transmissive projector device, there is a problem that the adjustment and arrangement of the optical system such as the projection lens and the reflecting surface become complicated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game display device that can easily enhance visual effects while having a simple configuration without complicating the optical system for projection. for the purpose.

(Appendix B1)
A game display device (for example, a game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information about a game as a projection image; a projection target (for example, a screen 110A) on which a projection image is projected by light projected from the projection means, and the projection target is an incidence surface (for example, an incidence and a display surface (for example, the (first) display surface 1101) on which a projection image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. The display surface has at least a first area and a second area divided by providing a thickness different from that of the first area.

With such a configuration, the entrance surface of the projection target is formed of a uniform surface, and the distance from the projection means to the entrance surface is constant. While the configuration can be simple, the visual effect can be easily enhanced by changing the visual impression of the projected image simply by making the thickness of the first region and the second region of the display surface different. can.

(Appendix B2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention comprises a light passage surface (for example, an aperture surface 10A) through which the light projected from the projection means passes, and the projected portion is arranged replaceably with respect to the light passage surface. characterized by being

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed simply by replacing the projection target arranged on the light passage surface, so that the display form can be freely changed. , the design and diversity of the display form can be enhanced.

Conventional game machines are equipped with a sheet member (decorative sheet), and by irradiating the back side of this sheet member with light to make the pattern (image) drawn on the sheet member visible from the front side, Some have enhanced effects (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-165868).

In addition, there is a game display device for displaying various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and application of the sheet member to such a game display device has also been proposed.

However, in the method disclosed in JP-A-2013-165868, it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the light due to the characteristics of the relatively thin sheet member, so it is difficult to change the contrast of the image displayed on the sheet member. There was a difficulty.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

(Appendix C1)
A game display device (for example, a game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes light emitting means for emitting light, and a plurality of light guides for guiding the light from the light emitting means from the back side to the front side. a plurality of sheet members arranged so as to face each other, and at least one sheet member among the plurality of sheet members being displaceable relative to the other sheet member and having a first position and a first position; and a driving means for moving between two positions, wherein when the one sheet member is at the first position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member move the light guide portions of the other sheet member. When the one sheet member partially or wholly overlaps with the plurality of light guide portions and moves from the first position to the second position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member may It is characterized by being in a position-shifted state with respect to the plurality of light guide portions of the other sheet member.

With such a configuration, for example, as one of the sheet members moves from the first position to the second position, the overlapped portion of the light guide portions of both sheet members gradually becomes smaller, and these guide portions become smaller. The amount of light that is guided from the light emitting means on the back side to the front side through the light portion gradually decreases. That is, one sheet member can be appropriately displaced with respect to the other sheet member, and the illuminance can be changed according to the degree of overlap between the two light guide portions. The contrast of the displayed image can be easily changed by adjusting the illumination, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

(Appendix C2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention comprises projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying game-related information as a projection image, and a main body section (for example, housing 10) for accommodating the projection means. a projection target portion (for example, a screen 110A) on which a projection image is projected by the light projected from the projection means; ), wherein the one sheet member is provided on the body portion, the other sheet member is provided on the cover portion, and the cover portion is replaceable with respect to the body portion characterized by

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image in the projection section can be changed by replacing the cover section integrally with the projection target section. The display form of the projected image can be freely changed simply by replacing the cover portion, and the design and diversity of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix C3)
A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 2a and a pachislot gaming machine 2b) includes light emitting means for emitting light, and a plurality of light emitting means for guiding the light from the light emitting means from the back side to the front side. a plurality of sheet members arranged to face each other, and at least one sheet member among the plurality of sheet members being displaceable relative to the other sheet member. and a driving means for moving between a position and a second position, wherein when the one sheet member is at the first position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member move to the other sheet member. When the one sheet member partially or wholly overlaps with the plurality of light guide portions of the member and the one sheet member moves from the first position to the second position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member is shifted with respect to the plurality of light guide portions of the other sheet member.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that exhibits the same effects as the gaming display device according to one aspect of the present invention.

A game system including a game display device and a game machine is known, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100. However, since this game system does not have the configuration and functions of a game display device and a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve interest. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game display device and a game machine that can improve the entertainment.

(Appendix D1)
A game display device according to one aspect of the present invention comprises projection means for projecting light for displaying game-related information as a projection image, a light passing surface through which the light projected from the projection means passes, and the light a projection target portion onto which a projection image is projected by transmission of light that has passed through the passage surface, the projection target portion having a display surface onto which the projection image is projected; The display surface is arranged to be replaceable, and the display surface is configured to be able to change the visual impression of the projected image according to the replacement of the projection target portion.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projected portion. It is possible to freely change the display form by simply changing the display form, and the design and diversity of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix D2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is characterized in that it has at least another display surface different from the display surface, and the other display surface is capable of displaying by a method different from the display of the projected image. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the information about the game by dividing the display surface on which the projected image is displayed and the other display surface. Since it is possible to display by different methods, it is possible to further improve the design and diversity of the display form.

The present invention also relates to a game display device compatible with a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. There is a display device that includes a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image onto a front screen (projection target) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Also, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and it has been proposed to configure such a game display device with a projector device. .

However, in recent years, there is a demand for a display form of a game display device that conforms to the layout and visual effects of a game arcade, as well as the design of a corresponding game machine. However, it is not possible to freely change such a display form, and there is room for improvement in terms of the design and diversity of the display form.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design and diversity of display forms and visual effects.

(Appendix E1)
In order to achieve the above object, the game display device according to the present invention includes projection means provided in a housing (10) of the game display device for projecting light for displaying game-related information as a projection image. (projector main body 12) and a projection target (screen 110A) on which the projection image is projected, in which at least one edge of the projection target (for example, the lower edge of the projection target) ), and provided on a substrate (70) on which at least one light emitting element is mounted, and on an edge facing the edge of the projection target (for example, the upper edge of the projection target) and a light shielding member (73) provided in a gap formed between the substrate and the housing.

According to the present invention, in addition to the image projected by the projection means, by providing the light emitting means for framing at least one edge of the projection screen, the visual effect and decorative effect of the display form can be enhanced.

In addition, by preventing leakage of light from the light emitting element into the housing, the irradiation efficiency is increased, and the brightness and resolution of the projection image projected onto the projection target are not affected.

(Appendix E2)
Further, in the game display device according to the present invention, the projected portion includes a light guide portion (incidence surface 1100) and a display portion (display surface 1101) each having a predetermined thickness, and the light guide portion is formed from the light emitting element. of light is guided to the irregular reflection portion. According to the present invention, the light from the light emitting element can be efficiently guided to the irregular reflection portion.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design and diversity of the display form and visual effects.

The present invention also relates to a game device compatible with a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Various gaming devices are connected to conventional gaming machines, and controls are performed based on information transmitted from the gaming machines. For example, a game display device (so-called data display device) for displaying statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. The game display device can display game information such as the number of wins in bonus games, etc., the number of games after the end of the previous win game state, and the number of medals obtained during the win game state. (see publication).

In general, a game display device is provided with a call button, and when a problem occurs in the game machine, the call button is pressed by the player to turn on the lamp provided on the game display device. The corner lamps installed at the corners of the island are lit to attract the attention of the staff.

By the way, a general call button is of a movable type that moves in the pressing direction when pressed by a player, and lighting control of the lamp is performed based on a signal from a sensor that detects the movement. Since such a movable call button has a gap in the moving part, it is easy for moisture and dust to enter. There is a possibility that the operating part will be fatigued by pressing the button repeatedly, and there is a problem that failures due to these factors are likely to occur. In addition, since the player normally pays attention mainly to playing the game, he/she rarely pays attention to such an arrangement of the call button. I often look for where the buttons are located. Therefore, it is preferable that the call button is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to understand.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the possibility of failure and making it easy for a player to understand where to operate. .

(Appendix F1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming device (gaming device F1) according to the present invention includes:
an exterior panel (exterior panel F1021) provided with a translucent design portion (design portion F1021b) in a touch area (touch area F1021a) touched by a player;
a touch sensor (touch sensor F1022) having translucency and provided in association with the touch area on the back side of the exterior panel to detect a touch input to the touch area;
a light source (LED array F1024);
a light guide plate (light guide plate F1023) provided on the back side of the touch sensor and guiding light from the light source toward the design portion of the exterior panel;
and a control means (control circuit F10250) for controlling lighting of the light source.

According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player on the touch area, the touch sensor detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control means is turned on by lighting control of the light source, the light from the light source is guided to the design section, and the player can visually recognize the light from the design section. With such a configuration, the design part in the touch area of the exterior panel is illuminated by the light from the light source, so that the player can easily recognize the place to be touched. Since the input is performed on the touch area formed in a plane, it is possible to prevent failures due to dust or the like entering the operating parts and failures due to fatigue of the movable parts.

(Appendix F2)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention,
The control means may perform control to change the lighting mode of the light source when there is a touch input to the touch area.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his/her own touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the light source that illuminates the design section. As a result, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the surface of the touch area caused by the player repeatedly touching the touch area until an attendant is called.

(Appendix F3)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention,
a translucent light guide plate (light guide plate G61) which is detachably arranged on the base (base G101) and has an opening (opening G61a) of a predetermined shape formed so as to penetrate in the thickness direction;
a plurality of light guide plate light sources (LED G60A) arranged at positions facing the opening-side end surface (opening-side end surface G61b) forming the opening of the light guide plate,
the plurality of light guide plate light sources are arranged side by side along the opening-side end face;
The light guide plate is subjected to reflection processing for reflecting part of the light guided into the light guide plate from the plurality of light guide plate light sources through the opening-side end face in the thickness direction of the light guide plate. A reflecting portion (reflecting portion G61d) is formed,
The control means may perform control to change the plurality of light sources for the light guide plate to a specific lighting mode when there is a touch input to the touch area.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of light sources takes on a specific lighting mode according to the player's touch input, spreads radially within the light guide plate, reaches the outer end surface, and reaches the periphery of the light guide plate. It becomes possible to illuminate the entirety in a circular manner, and the light guide plate illuminated in a specific lighting mode can be visually recognized from any direction of the game device. It becomes easier to specify the game machine to which the device is attached. Furthermore, the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate can improve the design, and the light guide plate is detachable from the substrate, so that it can be replaced with a light guide plate having a different design and reflective processing. It becomes possible to apply the gaming device to various types of gaming machines.

(Appendix F4)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention,
The control means may perform control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of light sources for the light guide plate according to the elapsed time from the timing of the touch input to the touch area.

According to the above configuration, the manager of the game hall can recognize at a glance even if the position is away from the game machine by visually recognizing the lighting state of the light guide plate for the time from the timing of the touch input by the player, Even if there are a plurality of gaming devices to which touch input has been performed, it is possible to give appropriate service to the player by making it possible to assign priorities to the devices.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game device that can reduce the possibility of failure and that allows the player to easily understand the operation points.

Various gaming devices are connected to conventional gaming machines, and controls are performed based on information transmitted from the gaming machines. For example, a game display device (so-called data display device) for displaying statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. The game display device can display game information such as the number of wins in bonus games, etc., the number of games played since the end of the previous win game state, and the number of medals won during the win game state, etc., and can perform effects based on the game information. Configured.

In general, the data display machine is configured to receive information from the gaming machine via an external terminal board provided by the gaming machine, and displays game information and effects based on the information from the gaming machine. . For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-036585, the data display machine is configured to perform an effect interlocked with an effect in the game machine based on information from the game machine.

By the way, there is a limit to the number of terminals that a general external terminal board can use to transmit signals to the data display machine. The types of game information that can be sent are limited. Therefore, it was difficult for the data display machine to increase the production patterns based on the game information.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game device and a game system capable of increasing the number of performance patterns based on game information.

(Appendix G1)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (data display machine H1) provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects in a mode corresponding to the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12); ,
have

A game system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2) in the game machine (game machine H2),
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects in a mode corresponding to the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12); ,
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the external terminal board of the gaming machine. The game state can be determined without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G2)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game machine (game machine H2) having light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state and a terminal board capable of transmitting a signal to the outside is provided individually for the game machine (game machine H2). ), a game device (data display machine H1) capable of receiving a signal relating to a predetermined type of game state among the game states to which the game machine (game machine H2) can shift via the terminal plate of ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12);
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects in accordance with the game state determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401);
have

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
a game machine (game machine H2) having a terminal board capable of transmitting a signal to the outside; a game device (data display machine H1) capable of receiving a signal relating to a predetermined type of game state among the game states to which the machine (gaming machine H2) can shift,
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12);
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects in accordance with the game state determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401);
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device receives a signal related to a predetermined type of game state from the terminal board capable of transmitting a signal to the outside, and also emits light from the gaming machine to indicate a game state different from the predetermined type of game state. A determination is made based on the means, and an effect corresponding to the game state of the game machine is executed. In general, there is a limit to the types of signals transmitted from the terminal board of the gaming machine. The state can be determined without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G3)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
It is a game device (data display machine H1) provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for presentation on the game side and changes the lighting mode according to the game state. hand,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
When the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting state of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the lighting state;
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect interlocking with an effect of the game machine (game machine H2) executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401). (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.);
have

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2),
Light-emitting means (top lamp H60) arranged in the game machine (game machine H2) and used for presentation on the game side to change the lighting mode according to the game state;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
When the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting state of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the lighting state;
Effect executing means capable of executing an effect interlocking with the effect of the game machine (game machine H2) executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401) (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.);
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means arranged in the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals sent from gaming machines to gaming devices. The game state can be determined without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G4)
A gaming device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
It is a game device (data display machine H1) provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for presentation on the game side and changes the lighting mode according to the game state. hand,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
When the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting state of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the lighting state;
During the period in which the lighting mode is continued, in the game machine (game machine H2) side effect executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401) Effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that continues execution of interlocked effects,
have.

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2),
A light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for the effect on the game side and changing the lighting mode according to the game state;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
When the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting state of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the lighting state;
During the period in which the lighting mode is continued, the game machine (game machine H2) side effect executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401) Effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that continues execution of interlocked effects,
have.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from gaming machines, but gaming devices limit the gaming status of the gaming machine because they use light-emitting means with lighting modes that differ depending on the gaming status of the gaming machine. can be determined without As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. In addition, the gaming device continues execution of the corresponding effect while the lighting mode is continued in the gaming machine. As a result, if there is a lighting mode, it is possible to perform a simple process of performing an effect for the same period, and it is possible to reduce resources and contribute to an increase in effect patterns.

(Appendix G5)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (data display) provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for presentation on the game side and changes the blinking period within a range difficult to recognize according to the game state machine H1),
image acquisition means for acquiring an image by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting a blinking cycle based on the image;
game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the blink period when the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the blink period;
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401);
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device (data display machine H1) displays the gaming state of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) based on the flashing period of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2). A game machine (game machine H2) executes an effect according to the game state of the game machine H2. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2), but the data display machine (data display machine H1) H1 can be used for each game state of the game machine (game machine H2) H2. Since the determination is made based on the flashing cycle of the top lamp H60 with different lighting modes, the game state of the gaming machine (game machine H2) H2 can be determined without restriction. As a result, the data display machine (data display machine H1) H1 can increase the effect pattern based on the game state of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) H2.

A game system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2),
a light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for the effect on the game side and varying the flashing period within a range difficult to recognize according to the game state;
image acquisition means for acquiring an image by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting a blinking cycle based on the image;
game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the blink period when the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the blink period;
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401);
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the blinking period of the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from gaming machines, but since gaming devices make decisions based on the flashing cycle of the light emitting means, which flashes at different flashing cycles for each game state of the gaming machine, The state can be determined without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G6)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for a series of game-side presentations consisting of a plurality of stages and varying the blinking period within a range difficult to recognize for each stage. device (data display H1),
image acquisition means for acquiring an image by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting a blinking cycle based on the image;
When the lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) detects the flashing cycle of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the game state is determined based on the flashing cycle to determine which stage of the game side effect is present. determination means (control unit H401);
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing the effect corresponding to the stage determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401). .

A game system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2),
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for a series of game-side productions consisting of a plurality of stages, and for varying the blinking period within a range that is difficult to recognize for each stage;
image acquisition means for acquiring an image by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting a blinking cycle based on the image;
When the lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) detects the flashing period of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the game state is determined based on the flashing period to determine which stage of the game side effect is present. determination means (control unit H401);
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects corresponding to the stages determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401). .

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect consisting of a plurality of stages according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals sent from gaming machines, but gaming devices determine each stage of a series of effects consisting of multiple stages of the game state of the gaming machine with light emitting means that flash differently. Therefore, even if it is temporarily impossible to determine the lighting means, it is possible to easily determine which stage of the performance is being executed at the time of restoration. As a result, the game device can perform effects interlocking with complicated effects of the game machine, and can increase the number of effect patterns based on the game state of the game machine.

(Appendix G7)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
It is a game device (data display machine H1) provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for presentation on the game side and changes the lighting mode according to the game state. hand,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
When the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting state of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the lighting state;
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit for selecting an effect corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401) and executing the effect H407 etc.) and
end condition storage means for pre-corresponding and storing end conditions for each game state;
effect terminating means for terminating the effect when the end condition corresponding to the game state of the effect being executed is satisfied;
have

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2),
A light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for the effect on the game side and changing the lighting mode according to the game state;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
When the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting state of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining a game state indicated by the lighting state;
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit for selecting the effect corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination unit (control unit H401) and executing the effect H407 etc.) and
end condition storage means for storing in advance the end conditions for each game state in association with each other;
effect ending means for terminating the effect when the end condition corresponding to the game state of the effect being executed is satisfied;
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Then, when the condition for ending the performance is satisfied, the performance is terminated. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from gaming machines, but gaming devices limit the gaming status of the gaming machine because they use light-emitting means with lighting modes that differ depending on the gaming status of the gaming machine. can be determined without As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. Further, by setting the end condition, even if the lighting mode of the light emitting means cannot be detected, the game device can perform as many effects as possible.

(Appendix G8)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (data display machine H1) provided individually in a game machine (game machine H2) having light emitting means (top lamp H60) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors used for game presentation,
an image acquiring means for acquiring an image in units of frames by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
In a plurality of images acquired by the image acquisition means within a predetermined period, when the light emission color of the light emission means (top lamp H60) is a specific number or more, the effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.),
have

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2),
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors used for game production;
an image acquiring means for acquiring an image in units of frames by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
In a plurality of images acquired by the image acquisition means within a predetermined period, when the light emission color of the light emission means (top lamp H60) is a specific number or more, the effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.),
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from gaming machines, but since gaming devices use light-emitting means with different lighting modes (blinking modes and light-emitting colors) for each gaming state of the gaming machine, To determine the game state of a game machine without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G9)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (game machine H2) individually provided in a game machine (game machine H2) that is communicably connected to a server and has light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for game effects and that changes the lighting mode according to the game state. a data display H1),
an effect acquisition means capable of downloading from the server an effect pattern set for each model of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) and associated with the lighting mode and the game state;
a storage means for storing the effect pattern acquired by the effect acquisition means;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means;
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit) for executing the effect according to the effect pattern stored in the storage unit according to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit H407 etc.) and
have

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system comprising a server, a game machine (game machine H2), and a game device (data display machine H1) that is communicably connected to the server and provided individually in the game machine (game machine H2). hand,
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for game production and changing the lighting mode according to the game state;
an effect acquisition means capable of downloading from the server an effect pattern set for each model of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) and associated with the lighting mode and the game state;
a storage means for storing the effect pattern acquired by the effect acquisition means;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means;
Effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.),
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there is a limit to the types of signals transmitted from the external terminal board of a gaming machine, but the gaming device has an effect pattern downloaded in advance from a server with light-emitting means having different lighting modes for each gaming state of the gaming machine. , the game state of the gaming machine can be determined without restriction. As a result, the data display machine can increase the number of production patterns based on the game state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G10)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (data display machine H1) provided individually and communicatively with a game machine (game machine H2) having light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state,
Signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects based on signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication; ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Lighting-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes a performance in a mode corresponding to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit (camera unit H12) )and,
The effect by the signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting-linked effect execution unit (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) Priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of setting priority with production,
Effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority order;
have

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (gaming machine H2) and a gaming device (data display machine H1) provided separately and communicatively with the gaming machine (gaming machine H2),
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state;
Signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects based on signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication; ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Lighting-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes a performance in a mode corresponding to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit (camera unit H12) )and,
The effect by the signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting-linked effect execution unit (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) Priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of setting priority with production,
Effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority order;
have

According to the above configuration, the data display machine determines the game state of the game machine based on the light emitting means of the game machine, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals sent from the external terminal board of a game machine. The game state can be determined without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. In addition, since the priority is set according to the effect, the gaming device can reduce the management load by increasing the effect pattern based on the game state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix G11)
A gaming device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game machine (game machine H2) having light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state and a terminal board capable of transmitting a signal to the outside is provided individually for the game machine (game machine H2). ), a game device (data display machine H1) capable of receiving a signal relating to a predetermined type of game state among the game states to which the game machine (game machine H2) can shift via the terminal plate of ,
terminal board signal game state determination means (control unit H401) for specifying the predetermined type of game state based on the signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12);
Priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of setting the order of priority between the predetermined type of game state and the game state different from the predetermined type of game state;
It has an effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting a game state in which the effect is executed according to the set priority order.

A game system according to the present invention includes:
a game machine (game machine H2) having a terminal board capable of transmitting a signal to the outside; a game device (data display machine H1) capable of receiving a signal relating to a predetermined type of game state among the game states to which the machine (gaming machine H2) can shift,
Light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state;
external terminal board signal game state determination means (control unit H401) for specifying the predetermined type of game state based on the signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication;
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection means (camera unit H12);
Priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of setting the order of priority between the predetermined type of game state and the game state different from the predetermined type of game state;
It has an effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting a game state in which the effect is executed according to the set priority order.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device transmits a predetermined type of game state from the terminal board capable of transmitting a signal to the outside, and also emits a predetermined type of game state to the light emitting means of the gaming machine. , and an effect corresponding to the game state of the game machine is executed. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the external terminal board of the gaming machine. The game state can be determined without restriction. In addition, since the order of priority is set for each game state, it is sufficient to determine the game state, select a game state with a high priority, and perform an effect corresponding thereto. It is possible to reduce the management load by increasing the production patterns based on the state.

(Appendix G12)
A gaming device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (gaming device (game machine H2) provided individually to communicate with a game machine (game machine H2) having light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that shifts the game state based on a lottery and changes the lighting mode according to the game state a data display H1),
Signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects based on signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication; ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Lighting-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes a performance in a mode corresponding to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit (camera unit H12) )and,
The effect by the signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting-linked effect execution unit (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) Priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of setting priority with production,
Effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority order;
transition storage means for storing transition patterns of the game state;
error detection means for performing collation with the transition pattern each time the effect is executed and detecting an error when the transition pattern is not matched;
have

A game system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) that shifts the game state based on a lottery, and a game device (data display machine H1) that is individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2) so as to be communicable. There is
Light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state;
Signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects based on signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication; ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Lighting-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes a performance in a mode corresponding to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit (camera unit H12) )and,
The effect by the signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting-linked effect execution unit (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) Priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) capable of setting priority with production,
Effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority order;
transition storage means for storing transition patterns of the game state;
error detection means for performing collation with the transition pattern each time the effect is executed and detecting an error when the transition pattern is not matched;
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals sent from gaming machines, but the data display machine determines the gaming status of the gaming machine by means of light-emitting means that have different lighting modes for each gaming status. can be determined without As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. In addition, since the priority is set according to the effect, the gaming device can reduce the management load by increasing the effect pattern based on the game state of the gaming machine. Furthermore, a game state transition pattern is stored, and an error can be detected when the actual transition does not conform to the pattern, and security can be improved.

(Appendix G13)
A game device (data display machine H1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (data display machine H1) provided individually and communicatively with a game machine (game machine H2) having light-emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state,
Synchronous effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) capable of executing effects synchronized with other game devices (data display machine H1);
Signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects based on signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication; ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Lighting-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes a performance in a mode corresponding to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit (camera unit H12) )and,
The effect by the signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting-linked effect execution unit (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) that can set the priority of the production and the synchronized production,
Effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority order;
have

A game system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display machine H1) separately provided so as to be communicable with the game machine (game machine H2),
Light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state;
Synchronous effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) capable of executing effects synchronized with other game devices (data display machine H1);
Signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing effects based on signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) through the communication; ,
lighting mode detection means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60);
Lighting-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes a performance in a mode corresponding to the lighting state detected by the lighting state detection unit (camera unit H12) )and,
The effect by the signal-linked effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting-linked effect execution unit (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and priority order setting means (production pattern table shown in FIG. 36, etc.) for setting the priority of the production and the synchronized production,
Effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority order;
have

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Then, when the condition for ending the performance is satisfied, the performance is terminated. In general, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the external terminal board of the gaming machine. The game state can be determined without restriction. As a result, the gaming device can increase the number of production patterns based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. In addition, since the priority order of effects including synchronous effects in which a plurality of gaming devices participate is set, the gaming devices can reduce the management load by increasing the performance pattern based on the game state of the gaming machine. becomes possible.

The gaming device performs various controls based on the information received from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device, which is an example of a game device, is configured to receive game information from a game machine and execute an effect based on the game information.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074170 discloses a game display device that receives information such as the operation status of the game machine from the game machine and displays history data of the game machine. Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074170 discloses resetting the CPU when an error occurs in the CPU of the game display device.

If the control means (CPU) of the game machine becomes incapable of communication and the control means (CPU) is reset as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074170, the information from the game machine is not retained. A situation may arise in which the history data of the game machine cannot be obtained.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the history data of a game machine cannot be obtained even when the control means of the game machine becomes unable to communicate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game device and a game system.

(Appendix H)
A game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention includes:
a first control means (main CPU 1p1);
a second control means (sub CPU 1p2) communicably connected to each of the game machine (game machine 2) and the first control means (main CPU 1p1);
a storage means (RAM1p3) communicably connected to the second control means (sub CPU1p2);
The second control means (sub CPU 1p2)
executing determination processing (S80) for determining whether or not communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is possible;
When it is determined in the determination process that communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is possible (S80: YES), the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) is stored in the storage means (RAM 1p3). and a transmission process (S82) for transmitting the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) to the first control means (main CPU 1p1),
When it is determined in the determination process that communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is impossible (S80: NO), the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) is transferred to the first control means (main CPU 1p1). A temporary storage process (S83) is executed to store the data in the storage means (RAM 1p3) without transmitting it to the CPU 1p1).

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine 2), a game device (game display device 1), and an external storage device (server device 4),
The game device (game display device 1) is
a first control means (main CPU 1p1);
a second control means (sub CPU 1p2) communicably connected to each of the game machine (game machine 2) and the first control means (main CPU 1p1);
a storage means (RAM1p3) communicably connected to the second control means (sub CPU1p2);
The second control means (sub CPU 1p2)
executing determination processing (S80) for determining whether or not communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is possible;
When it is determined in the determination process that communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is possible (S80: YES), the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) is stored in the storage means (RAM 1p3). and a transmission process (S82) for transmitting the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) to the first control means (main CPU 1p1),
When it is determined in the determination process that communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is impossible (S80: NO), the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) is transferred to the first control means (main CPU 1p1). Execute temporary storage processing (S83) to store in the storage means (RAM1p3) without transmitting to CPU1p1),
The first control means (main CPU 1p1) is communicably connected to the external storage device (server device 4), and transmits the information transmitted in the transmission process (S82) to the external storage device (server device 4). do.

According to the above configuration, when the first control means of the game device cannot communicate, the second control means of the game device stores the information received from the game machine in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the history data of the gaming machine cannot be obtained even if the control means of the gaming device becomes unable to communicate.

Further, in the game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention,
The second control means (sub CPU 1p2)
In the determination process, it is determined that communication with the first control means (main CPU 1p1) is impossible (S80: NO), and after the temporary storage process is executed (S83), the first control means in the determination process If it is determined that communication with (main CPU 1p1) is possible (S84: YES),
the storage process (S85);
Return transmission for transmitting the information received from the game machine (game machine 2) and the information stored in the storage means (RAM1p3) in the temporary storage process (S83) to the first control means (main CPU1p1) It is preferable to perform processing (S86).

According to the above configuration, when the first control means of the gaming device returns from the disabled state to the communicable state, by transmitting the information temporarily stored in the storage means to the first control means, The first control means receives all of the information output by the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to obtain the history data of the gaming machine with certainty.

The gaming device performs various controls based on information received from the gaming machine, and transmits the information to an external device. For example, a game display device, which is an example of a game device, is configured to receive game information from a game machine and execute an effect based on the game information.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-16259 discloses a technique of providing a photorelay circuit on an external terminal plate of a gaming machine, which enables transmission and reception of signals while being electrically insulated from the gaming device.

When the gaming device is powered off, the information transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device is not transmitted to the external device. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16259 does not describe any method for coping with such a case. In the technique disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-16259, when information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device while the gaming device is powered off, the information is not sent to the external device, causing various inconveniences. can occur.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems. To provide a game device and a game system capable of

(Appendix I)
A game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (game display device 1) communicably connected to each of a game machine (game machine 2) and an external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4),
a first power supply (first power supply 1x);
a second power supply (second power supply 1y) independent from the first power supply (first power supply 1x);
Driven by being supplied with power from the first power source (first power source 1x), and transmits information received from the game machine (game machine 2) to the external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4). transmission means (first photocoupler 1c1, second photocoupler 1c2);
and a control means (control unit 1p) driven by receiving power supply from the second power supply (second power supply 1y),
When both the first power supply (first power supply 1x) and the second power supply (second power supply 1y) are ON, the information received by the transmission means (first photocoupler 1c1) from the game machine (game machine 2) Through processing for transmitting to the external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4) without changing the information, and information received by the transmission means (first photocoupler 1c1) from the gaming machine (gaming machine 2) is selectively executed under the control of the control means (control unit 1p);
When the first power supply (first power supply 1x) is ON and the second power supply (second power supply 1y) is OFF, the through processing is executed.

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine 2), a game device (game display device 1), and an external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4),
The game device (game display device 1) is
communicably connected to each of the game machine (game machine 2) and the external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4);
a first power supply (first power supply 1x);
a second power supply (second power supply 1y) independent from the first power supply (first power supply 1x);
Driven by being supplied with power from the first power source (first power source 1x), and transmits information received from the game machine (game machine 2) to the external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4). transmission means (first photocoupler 1c1, second photocoupler 1c2);
and a control means (control unit 1p) driven by receiving power supply from the second power supply (second power supply 1y),
The game device (game display device 1) is
When both the first power supply (first power supply 1x) and the second power supply (second power supply 1y) are ON, the information received by the transmission means (first photocoupler 1c1) from the game machine (game machine 2) Through processing for transmitting to the external device (game medium lending device 3, server device 4) without changing the information, and information received by the transmission means (first photocoupler 1c1) from the gaming machine (gaming machine 2) is selectively executed under the control of the control means (control unit 1p);
When the first power supply (first power supply 1x) is ON and the second power supply (second power supply 1y) is OFF, the through processing is executed.

According to the above configuration, even if information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device while the second power source of the gaming device is OFF, if the first power source of the gaming device is ON, the through processing is executed. and the information received by the transmission means from the game machine is transmitted to the external device without being changed. Therefore, even when information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device while the gaming device is powered off, the information can be transmitted to the external device.

The gaming device performs various controls based on the information received from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device, which is an example of a game device, is configured to receive game information from a game machine and execute an effect based on the game information.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-210798 discloses a main control board, a sub-control board connected to the main control board via signal lines, and a driver board connected to the sub-control board via signal lines and power lines. A production device (game device) is shown.

If a connection failure occurs between the boards and power is continuously supplied from one board to the other board, there may arise a problem that parts on the other board may be short-circuited and damaged. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-210798 does not describe any method for coping with this problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game device and a game system that can prevent parts from being short-circuited or damaged even when a connection failure occurs between boards. and

(Appendix J)
A game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention includes:
A game device (game display device 1) communicably connected to a game machine (game machine 2),
a first board (main board 1m1) on which a first power supply (main power supply 1x1) and a first control means (main CPU 1p1) driven by receiving power supply from the first power supply (main power supply 1x1) are mounted; ,
a second power supply (sub power supply 1x2) that receives power supply from the first power supply (main power supply 1x1); a second board (sub board 1m2) on which a second control means (sub CPU 1p2) driven by receiving power supply from ) is mounted,
The first control means (main CPU 1p1)
a first determination process (S100) for determining whether or not the first board (main board 1m1) and the second board (sub board 1m2) are connected to each other;
When it is determined in the first determination process that the first board (main board 1m1) and the second board (sub board 1m2) are connected to each other (S100: YES), the first power supply (main Power supply start processing (S101) for starting power supply from the power source 1x1) to the second power source (sub power source 1x2);
a second determination process (S103) for determining whether or not the second control means (sub CPU 1p2) is driven after power supply is started in the power supply start process (S101);
When it is determined in the second determination process that the second control means (sub CPU 1p2) is not driven (S103: NO), the first power source (main power source 1x1) is switched to the second power source (sub power source 1x2). power supply stop processing (S105) for stopping the power supply of the .

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine 2) and a game device (game display device 1) communicably connected to the game machine (game machine 2),
The game device (game display device 1) is
a first board (main board 1m1) on which a first power supply (main power supply 1x1) and a first control means (main CPU 1p1) driven by receiving power supply from the first power supply (main power supply 1x1) are mounted; ,
a second power supply (sub power supply 1x2) that receives power supply from the first power supply (main power supply 1x1); a second board (sub board 1m2) on which a second control means (sub CPU 1p2) driven by receiving power supply from ) is mounted,
The first control means (main CPU 1p1)
a first determination process (S100) for determining whether or not the first board (main board 1m1) and the second board (sub board 1m2) are connected to each other;
When it is determined in the first determination process that the first board (main board 1m1) and the second board (sub board 1m2) are connected to each other (S100: YES), the first power supply (main Power supply start processing (S101) for starting power supply from the power source 1x1) to the second power source (sub power source 1x2);
a second determination process (S103) for determining whether or not the second control means (sub CPU 1p2) is driven after power supply is started in the power supply start process (S101);
When it is determined in the second determination process that the second control means (sub CPU 1p2) is not driven (S103: NO), the first power source (main power source 1x1) is switched to the second power source (sub power source 1x2). power supply stop processing (S105) for stopping the power supply of the .

According to the above configuration, the first control means determines whether or not the second control means is driven after the power supply from the first power supply to the second power supply is started, and determines that the second control means is not driven. If so, the power supply from the first power supply to the second power supply is stopped. As a result, even if a connection failure occurs between the boards, it is possible to prevent short-circuiting and damage to the parts.

Further, in the game display device (game display device 1) according to the present invention,
Preferably, the first control means (main CPU 1p1) further executes the first determination process (S100) after the power supply stop process (S105).

According to the above configuration, after the power supply from the first power supply to the second power supply is temporarily stopped because the driving of the second control means is not confirmed, the presence or absence of connection between the boards is determined again. Then, if the connection between the boards is confirmed, power supply from the first power supply to the second power supply is started, and if the drive of the second control means is confirmed, the power supply is continued. As a result, even after the power supply from the first power supply to the second power supply is temporarily stopped, power is supplied again if appropriate connection between the boards is realized, and the second control means is operated by the second power supply. can be driven.

The gaming device performs various controls based on the information received from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device, which is an example of a game device, is configured to receive game information from a game machine and execute an effect based on the game information.

A gaming device generally includes storage means for storing information received from a gaming machine. As a countermeasure when a problem occurs in the information stored in the storage means, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-72695 discloses that two memories are provided, information is written to and read from each memory, and information is stored in one memory. It is shown that if the stored information is not correct, the information stored in the other memory is read and written to the one memory.

If an event such as a power failure occurs while information is being written to memory, the information may be destroyed. In this case, if the same information (corrupted information) is written in two memories (storage means), the storage means cannot be restored.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the above problems, and to provide a game device and a game system capable of restoring storage means even when information is destroyed by an event such as power failure. With the goal.

(Appendix K)
A game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention includes:
a control means (sub CPU 1p2) communicably connected to the game machine (game machine 2);
a first storage means (first memory 1r1);
and a second storage means (second memory 1r2),
The control means (sub CPU 1p2)
The game is played so that the information written in the second storage means (second memory 1r2) at the same point in time is prior to the information written in the first storage means (first memory 1r1). a writing process (S111) for writing the information received from the machine (gaming machine 2) to the first storage means (first memory 1r1) and the second storage means (second memory 1r2) at different timings;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (an event such as power failure occurred during the most recent writing) (S110: YES), the information written in the first storage means (first memory 1r1) is read out. 1 reading process (S112);
a first determination process (S113) for determining whether or not the information read in the first read process (S112) is normal;
a second reading process (S114) for reading the information written in the second storage means (second memory 1r2) when it is determined in the first determination process that the information is not normal (S113: NO); ,
and a restoration process (S116) for writing the information read in the second read process (S114) into the first storage means (first memory 1r1).

A game system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine 2) and a game device (game display device 1),
The game device (game display device 1) is
When the gaming machine (gaming machine 2) is communicably connected (sub CPU 1p2),
a first storage means (first memory 1r1);
and a second storage means (second memory 1r2),
The control means (sub CPU 1p2)
The game is played so that the information written in the second storage means (second memory 1r2) at the same point in time is prior to the information written in the first storage means (first memory 1r1). a writing process (S111) for writing the information received from the machine (gaming machine 2) to the first storage means (first memory 1r1) and the second storage means (second memory 1r2) at different timings;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (an event such as power failure occurred during the most recent writing) (S110: YES), the information written in the first storage means (first memory 1r1) is read out. 1 reading process (S112);
a first determination process (S113) for determining whether or not the information read in the first read process (S112) is normal;
a second reading process (S114) for reading the information written in the second storage means (second memory 1r2) when it is determined in the first determination process that the information is not normal (S113: NO); ,
and a restoration process (S116) for writing the information read in the second read process (S114) into the first storage means (first memory 1r1).

According to the above configuration, information is written to the first storage means and the second storage means at different timings in the writing process, and the information written to the second storage means is written to the first storage means at the same point in time. It is the information that precedes the information that is currently being used. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (an event such as power failure occurs), the information written in the first storage means is read, and when the information is not normal, the second storage means Information written in the means (information prior to information written in the first storage means) is written in the first storage means. As a result, even if the information is destroyed by an event such as power failure, the storage means can be restored.

Further, in the game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention,
The control means (sub CPU 1p2)
After the second reading process (S114) and before the restoration process (S116), a second determination process (S115) for determining whether or not the information read in the second reading process (S114) is normal. and run
When it is determined that the information is normal in the second determination process (S115: YES), the restoration process (S116) is executed,
When it is determined that the information is not normal in the second determination process (S115: NO), the restoration process (S116) is not executed, and the first storage means (first memory 1r1) and the second storage It is preferable to execute an initialization process (S117) for initializing the means (second memory 1r2).

According to the above configuration, when the information written in the second memory means is not normal, it is possible to avoid the situation where the abnormal information is written in the first memory means.

The gaming device performs various controls based on the information received from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device, which is an example of a game device, is configured to receive game information from a game machine and execute an effect based on the game information.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-7031 discloses a game device provided with an external storage device for storing information from a game machine.

By the way, if an abnormality (such as power failure) occurs in the power supply of the game device while the external storage device (storage means) is in operation, the storage means may malfunction. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-7031 does not describe any method for dealing with this problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems. And it aims at providing a game system.

(Appendix L)
A game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention includes:
a control means (main CPU 1p1) communicably connected to the gaming machine (gaming machine 2);
Storage means (SSD1l) communicably connected to the control means (main CPU1p1);
a power supply means (DC/DC converter 1j) for supplying power to the storage means (SSD 1l);
The power supply means (DC/DC converter 1j) is equipped with power storage means (capacitor 1k) for storing power,
The control means (main CPU 1p1)
a determination process (S122) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the power supply of the game device (game display device 1);
If it is determined in the determination process that the power source has failed (S122: YES), an end command transmission process (S123) of transmitting an end command to the storage means (SSD1l) is executed.

A gaming system according to the present invention includes:
A game system having a game machine (game machine 2) and a game device (game display device 1),
The game device (game display device 1) is
a control means (main CPU 1p1) communicably connected to the gaming machine (gaming machine 2);
Storage means (SSD1l) communicably connected to the control means (main CPU1p1);
a power supply means (DC/DC converter 1j) for supplying power to the storage means (SSD 1l);
The power supply means (DC/DC converter 1j) is equipped with power storage means (capacitor 1k) for storing power,
The control means (main CPU 1p1)
a determination process (S122) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the power supply of the game device (game display device 1);
If it is determined in the determination process that the power source has failed (S122: YES), an end command transmission process (S123) of transmitting an end command to the storage means (SSD1l) is executed.

According to the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs in the power supply of the gaming device, the control means transmits the end command to the storage means. The storage means can receive the power stored by the power storage means to complete the termination process. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the power source of the game device while the storage means is operating, it is possible to prevent the storage means from malfunctioning.

Further, in the game device (game display device 1) according to the present invention,
The control means (main CPU 1p1)
After executing the termination command transmission process (S123), it is preferable not to perform communication with the storage means (SSD1l).

According to the above configuration, the storage means prohibits new access from the control means during the termination process, and no new writing process or the like is performed, so that the termination process can be completed appropriately and promptly. . Also, the control means can execute termination processing and the like of other systems regardless of completion of the termination processing of the storage means. Therefore, the termination processing of the entire system including the termination processing of the storage means can be completed in the minimum amount of time.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-167874 discloses a gaming machine provided with an image display device. In such a game machine, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped frame as a housing for housing a control board for controlling the entire image display device is attached to the back side of the game board. The upper surface of the frame is formed with an exhaust port for discharging the air inside the frame. As a result, the air in the frame whose temperature has risen due to the heat generated by the control board can be discharged from the exhaust port, so that the temperature in the frame can be prevented from becoming too high.

In the frame housing the control board as described above, for example, game balls falling from a replenishment gutter installed above an island on which pachinko machines are arranged may land on the exhaust port. In this way, when the foreign matter is so heavy that it cannot be removed only by the flow of air discharged from the exhaust port, the foreign matter may clog the exhaust port and reduce the exhaust efficiency. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a circuit board storage case capable of suppressing clogging of an air discharge port with foreign matter.

(Appendix M)
The substrate housing case (control unit 9) according to the present invention is
A substrate (substrate 91) on which electronic components are mounted;
A substrate case (substrate case 93) capable of accommodating the substrate (substrate 91) therein;
an exhaust means (exhaust fan 99) capable of discharging the air inside the board case (board case 93) to the outside of the board case (board case 93),
The substrate case (board case 93) has an exhaust port (exhaust port 93a) at its upper portion that can exhaust the air discharged from the exhaust means (exhaust fan 99) to the outside of the substrate case (board case 93). death,
The discharge port (discharge port 93a) is formed to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

According to the above configuration, the discharge port is formed to be inclined with respect to the horizontal surface. can be dropped into Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outlet from being clogged with foreign matter.

Further, in the substrate housing case (control unit 9) according to the present invention,
The discharge port (discharge port 93a) is formed with ribs (ribs 98a and 98c) that rise from the periphery of the discharge port (discharge port 93a) toward the center.

According to the above configuration, even if foreign matter reaches the center of the discharge port, the foreign matter can be dropped outside the discharge port along the ribs.

Various gaming devices are connected to conventional gaming machines. The game device includes various electronic devices inside, and is controlled based on information transmitted from the game machine. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-047306 discloses a gaming device provided with a camera unit.

In the game device as described above, when the housing unit housing the electronic device is mounted on the mounting base of the game device, the mounting direction of the housing unit with respect to the mounting base may be incorrect. If the housing unit is mounted in the wrong direction, there is a risk of erroneous mounting or damage to the member.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game device capable of avoiding erroneous attachment of a housing case housing an electronic device and breakage of members.

(Appendix N)
A game device (game device J1) according to the present invention includes:
an accommodation unit (camera unit J12) containing an electronic device in an accommodation case (accommodation case J121); a mounting base (liquid crystal base J104, camera unit base J105) to which the accommodation unit (camera unit J12) can be attached; A game device (game device J1) comprising
The accommodation case (accommodation case J121) includes a first guide portion (slide convex portion J125) provided on the first surface (upper surface J122a) side and a second guide portion (slide convex portion J125) provided on the side opposite to the first surface (upper surface J122a). A second guide portion (convex portion J126) provided on the surface (lower surface J123a) side and having a different shape from the first guide portion (slide convex portion J125) is formed,
The mounting base (liquid crystal base J104, camera unit base J105) includes a first guide portion (notch J104b) for guiding the first guide portion (slide convex portion J125), a second guide portion (convex portion J126 ) and a second guide portion (notch J105a) are formed.

According to the above configuration, the shape of the first guide portion provided on the first surface side of the storage case is different from that of the second guide portion provided on the second surface side. Therefore, even if the housing unit is to be attached to the mounting base in such a posture that the first surface and the second surface are opposite to each other, the first guide portion and the second guide portion do not cause the first guide portion and the second guide portion to move. I can't guide the department. Therefore, erroneous attachment of the storage unit can be suppressed, and damage to members due to erroneous attachment can be suppressed.

Further, in the game device (game device J1) according to the present invention,
The electronic device is housed in the housing case (housing case J121) so that at least a portion thereof faces the outside of the housing case (housing case J121),
The second guide portion (convex portion J126) is formed around a portion facing the outside of the housing case (housing case J121) of the electronic device.

According to the above configuration, the electronic device facing the outside of the storage case can be protected by the second guide portion.

Further, in the game device (game device J1) according to the present invention,
The electronic device includes an optical lens (optical lens J127),
The second guide portion (convex portion J126) is formed around the optical lens (optical lens J127).

According to the above configuration, the optical lens can be protected by the second guide portion, so that the optical lens can be prevented from being scratched or damaged.

Furthermore, in the game device (game device J1) according to the present invention,
The first guide portion (slide convex portion J125) is arranged on the first surface (upper surface J122a) in the direction in which the accommodation unit (camera unit J12) is attached to the attachment base (liquid crystal base J104, camera unit base J105). It is formed at a position shifted from the center of the storage case (accommodation case J121) in the orthogonal direction.

According to the above configuration, when an attempt is made to mount the housing unit on the mounting base in a posture in which the front and back of the mounting direction to the mounting base are reversed from the original orientation, the first guide portion and the first guide portion are guided. Since the positional relationship with respect to the direction orthogonal to the mounting direction is shifted from the first guide portion, the accommodation unit cannot be mounted. Therefore, erroneous attachment of the storage unit can be more reliably suppressed.

In addition, in the game device (game device J1) according to the present invention,
The end portion of the first guide portion (slide convex portion J125) is located at the rear end portion of the first surface (upper surface J122a) in the mounting direction.

If the housing unit is inserted even slightly into the housing space defined by the mounting base in a position different from the original, there is a possibility that the parts will be damaged. According to the above configuration, when an attempt is made to mount the housing unit on the mounting base in a posture in which the front and back of the mounting direction are reversed from the original, the end of the first guide portion is located on the rear side of the mounting base in the mounting direction. Abut the edge. Therefore, since the housing unit is not inserted into the housing space defined by the mounting base in such a posture that the front and rear of the mounting direction are reversed from the original, damage to the parts can be more reliably suppressed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines and gaming devices connected to gaming machines are provided with decorative light-emitting devices for improving the aesthetic appearance. As an example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116909 describes a light guide member that emits surface light from the light entering from the end surface, and a plurality of light emitting means that emit light toward the end surface of the light guide member. A game machine with a device is disclosed.

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-116909, when the adjacent LEDs are caused to emit light in different colors from each other and surface light is emitted by the light guide member, the light emitting areas of the adjacent LEDs partially overlap and emit light. There is a problem in that the colors are mixed with each other, resulting in a presentation of colors different from the colors of light emitted from the respective LEDs.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting device that suppresses mixing of colors of light emitted from adjacent light-emitting means.

(Appendix O)
The light-emitting device (light-emitting device 2001) according to the present invention is
A light-emitting device (light-emitting device 2001) comprising a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 2005) and a light guide member (light guide panel 2010) for guiding light from the light-emitting means (LEDs 2005),
The plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 2005) are arranged at predetermined intervals at positions facing the light guide member (light guide panel 2010),
The light guide member (light guide panel 2010) has a first light guide portion (first light guide portion 2015) and a second light guide portion (second light guide portion 2016),
The first light guide portion (first light guide portion 2015) includes a first light entrance portion (first light entrance portion 2015a) into which light emitted from the light emitting means (LED 2005) enters, and the plurality of light emitting portions. means (LEDs 2005), and diffuses the light received from the first light entrance portion (first light entrance portion 2015a) into a predetermined range for each of the corresponding light emitting means (LEDs 2005). including a plurality of individual light guide portions (individual light guide portions 2015b) that emit light in one direction,
The second light guide portion (second light guide portion 2016) is a second light entrance portion (second light entrance portion) into which light emitted from the plurality of individual light guide portions (individual light guide portions 2015b) enters. 2016a), and a light emitting portion (light emitting portion 2016b) that reflects the light incident from the second light entering portion (second light entering portion 2016a).

According to the above configuration, the plurality of individual light guide portions formed corresponding to each of the plurality of light emitting means diffuses the light from the first light entrance portion to a predetermined range for each light emitting means while diffusing it in one direction. Since the light is emitted, it is possible to clearly emit light from each of the light emitting means in each fixed range of the light emitting section. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the mixture of the colors of light emitted from the adjacent light emitting means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines and gaming devices connected to gaming machines are provided with decorative light-emitting devices for improving the aesthetic appearance. As an example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116909 describes a light guide member that emits surface light from the light entering from the end surface, and a plurality of light emitting means that emit light toward the end surface of the light guide member. A game machine with a device is disclosed.

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-116909, a plurality of LEDs are installed to allow light to enter from the end face of the light guide member, thereby causing the light guide member to emit light evenly from the surface. For example, the outside of the substantially L-shaped portion, which is the outer peripheral edge of the light guide member and is composed of a rounded portion (corner) having a predetermined radius of curvature and two straight portions connected to both ends of the rounded portion. When the periphery is to emit light, it is conceivable to install the LEDs so that light is emitted radially from the LEDs toward the rounded portion in order to cause the rounded portion to emit light. However, although the radial light emitted from the LED is likely to be reflected by the rounded portion and emit light, the portion of the straight portion near the rounded portion is less likely to reflect and emit light. For this reason, there arises a problem that light emission from the LED is reduced in the vicinity of the rounded portion.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a light-emitting device capable of clearly emitting light even in the vicinity of the round portion of each linear portion connected to the end portion of the round portion. With the goal.

(Appendix P)
The light-emitting device (light-emitting device 2001) according to the present invention is
A light emitting device (light emitting device 2001) comprising light emitting means (LED 2005) and a light guide member (light guide panel 2010) for guiding light from the light emitting means (LED 2005),
The light guide member (light guide panel 2010) has a first light guide portion (first light guide portion 2015) and a second light guide portion (second light guide portion 2016),
The first light guide portion (first light guide portion 2015) has a first light incident end face (first input end face 2015a1) into which light emitted from the light emitting means enters and a curved surface having a first curvature radius. and a light output surface (light output surface 2015d1) for outputting light incident from the first light input end surface (first input end surface 2015a1),
The second light guide portion (second light guide portion 2016) includes a second light incident end surface (second light incident end surface 2016a1) into which light emitted from the light exit surface (light exit surface 2015d1) enters, 2 a light-emitting portion (light-emitting portion 2016) that reflects and emits light incident from the light-incident end face (second light-incident end face 2016a1),
The light-emitting portion (light-emitting portion 2016) includes a rounded portion (rounded portion 2017) that intersects with the normal line of the light exit surface (light exit surface 2015d1) and has a second radius of curvature, and one end of the rounded portion (rounded portion 2017). A first linear portion (straight portion 2018) extending linearly from and intersecting the normal line of the light output surface (light output surface 2015d1), and the other end of the rounded portion (rounded portion 2017) extending from the first linear portion ( It has a second straight portion (straight portion 2019) extending linearly in a direction intersecting with the straight portion 2018) and intersecting with the normal line of the light output surface (light output surface 2015d1),
In the light-emitting portion (light-emitting portion 2016), the portion orthogonal to the normal to the light exit surface (light exit surface 2015d1) of the first straight portion (straight portion 2018) and the second straight portion (straight portion 2019) and the An auxiliary light-emitting surface (auxiliary light-emitting surface 2016c2) is formed between each of the rounded portions (rounded portion 2017), the in-plane direction of which is perpendicular to the normal line of the light emitting surface (light-emitting surface 2015d1).

According to the above configuration, since the auxiliary light emitting surface is formed between the rounded portion and the portion perpendicular to the normal to the light emitting surface of the first straight portion and the second straight portion of the light emitting portion, the light emitting surface The light emitted from is more likely to be emitted from the auxiliary light emitting surface. Therefore, it is possible to emit light clearly even in the vicinity of the rounded portion of each linear portion connected to the end portion of the rounded portion.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines and gaming devices connected to gaming machines are provided with decorative light-emitting devices for improving the aesthetic appearance. As an example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116909 describes a light guide member that emits surface light from the light entering from the end surface, and a plurality of light emitting means that emit light toward the end surface of the light guide member. A game machine with a device is disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-116909, for example, when the user touches the light guide member and members in the vicinity thereof, static electricity from the outside is applied to the LED through the light guide member and the like. This causes a problem that the LED substrate is short-circuited and damaged.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems. The purpose is to provide an apparatus.

(Appendix Q)
The light-emitting device (light-emitting device 2001) according to the present invention is
An outer panel (outer panel 2030) capable of forming an accommodation space inside, a light emitting means (LED 2005) accommodated in the accommodation space (accommodation space 2031), and a light guide member for guiding light from the light emitting means (LED 2005) (Light guide panel 2010) A light emitting device (light emitting device 2001) comprising
The light guide member (light guide panel 2010) has a light incident end face (first light incident end face 2015a1) adjacent to the light emitting means (LED 2005) and into which the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED 2005) enters. One part (first part 2015a) and a second part (second portion 2014) and
The first portion (first portion 2015a) is accommodated in the accommodation space (accommodation space 2031), and the second portion (second portion 2014) is partially in the accommodation space (accommodation space 2031). exposed to the outside,
The surface (rear surface 2016a2) of the light guide member (light guide panel 2010) and the end (end 2009a) of the outer panel (outer panel 2030) are adjacent to the light guide member (light guide panel 2010). A protrusion (protrusion 2016a3) is provided for increasing the creepage distance from the portion where the light enters to the light incident end face (first light entering end face 2015a1).

According to the above configuration, since the protrusion is formed on the light guide member to increase the creepage distance, for example, even if the user touches the light emitting unit, static electricity is transmitted to the light emitting unit, short-circuiting and damaging the light emitting unit. can be suppressed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game display device 2... Game machine 2a... Pachinko game machine 2b... Pachislot game machine 3... Game medium lending device 3a... Game ball lending device 3b... Medal lending device 10... Housing 11A 11F Screen unit 110A to 110F Screen (projected part) 1100 Incidence surface (light guide part) 1101 Display surface (display part) 12 Projector body (projection means) 13 Reflector 14 Operation unit 30 Movable decorative sheet 40 Fixed decorative sheet 70 Substrate 71 Light emitting element (LED) 72 Diffuse reflection part 73 to 75 Light shielding member G1 Game device G101 Substrate G61a... Opening, G61... Light guide plate, G61b... Opening side end face, G60A... LED, G61d... Reflecting portion, G60... LED substrate, G60e/G61e... Positioning portion, G101e... Positioning member, F1... Gaming device, F1021b Translucent portion F1021 Exterior panel F1021a Touch area F1022 Touch sensor F1024 LED array F1023 Light guide plate F10250 Control circuit

Claims (1)

A light-emitting device comprising an outer panel capable of forming an accommodation space therein, a light-emitting means accommodated in the accommodation space, and a light guide member for guiding light from the light-emitting means,
The light guide member includes a first portion adjacent to the light emitting means and having a light incident end face into which the light emitted from the light emitting means enters; a second portion having a portion formed thereon;
The first portion has a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction, and is accommodated in the accommodation space. exposed to the outside of the
The light guide member is provided with a projection for increasing a creepage distance from a portion where the surface of the light guide member and the edge of the outer panel are adjacent to the light incident end face. A light-emitting device characterized by:

Images